458362 A7 B7 --- 1 ---—--- 五、發明說明（ί〉 <發明之領域> (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 本發明係有關於安全系統，且更特別地係有關於 使用在動力設備上的高速安全止動機構。 <發明之背景> 開始於工業革命，並持續到現今，機械化設備相較於_ 人工操作的工具，已經讓工人以較高的速度和較少的勞力 來生產產品。不幸地，機械化設備的動力和高操作速度對 於那些操作此類機器的人造成危險。每年有數以千計的人 由於涉及動力設備的意外而受到傷殘或失去生命。 線- 如同所期待的，許多系統已經被發展出來，讓使用動 力設備時所受到的傷害風險降低到最小的程度。或許最普 通的安全功能是一防護裝置，該防護裝置防堵操作者身體 接觸到機器的危險元件，像是皮帶、軸桿、或刀葉。在許 多案例之中，防護裝置能夠有效地減少受傷的風險，然而 ，有許多例子，其所要進行的作業其本質上已排除了使用 能夠完全堵住能接近危險機器元件之通路的防護裝置。 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 種種系統已經被提出在不能夠有效利用防護裝置的場 合可用來防止意外的傷害。例如，美國專利編號：9 4 1 , 726 ' 2,978,084 ' 3,011,610 ' 3,047 ，1 16、4,195,722、和4,321，841 等，這些 專利——在此處已將其所揭示的納入以供參照——全部都 揭示配合動力沖床使用的安全系統。這些系統利用連接到 操作者手腕上的纜線，這些纜線是在機器操作時將使用者 的手自工作區中拉回，或是阻止機器的操作直到使用者的 4 本紙張尺度適用t國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210 X 297公釐） 88 β 2 Α7 Β7 五、發明說明（> ) 手離開危險地帶爲止。美國專利編號：3，9 5 3,7 7 0、 4,075,9 6 1 ' 4,470,046 ' 4,532,501 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 、和5，2 1 2，6 2 1 一一此處已將其所揭示的納入以供參 照--揭示無線電頻率之安全系統，這些安全系統利用無 線電頻率的信號來偵測使用者的手出現在機器的危險區域 裏’並且一旦發現便阻止或中斷該機器的作業。 美國專利編號4,959,909、5,025，175、 5,122,091 ' 5,198,702 ' 5,201,684 ' 5，272,946、和5,510,685掲示配合肉品去 皮設備使用的安全系統，它們已被納入到本技術說明之中 ’以供參照。這些系統在使用者的手觸及到機器中任何危 險部份的時候，即會中斷或反轉送至機器裏的電源，或是 將離合器脫離嚙接狀態。一般而言，在使用者和機器之間 的接觸是藉由監控設置在使用者穿戴的手套裏的細金屬網 與機器之危險區域中某些金屬元件之間的電氣接觸而被偵 測出來。雖然，此類系統是適於配合肉品去皮機器來使用 ’它們在停止機器切削元件的運動上是相對較慢的，這是 因爲它們是依賴電磁閥的操作，或是必須克服馬達的慣性 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 質量。然而，由於這些系統是以相對較低的速度運轉，所 以刀葉不需要被快速地停止以防止對使用者造成嚴重的傷 〇 美國專利編號3,7 85,230和4，026,177 — 一該專利所揭示的已被納入本技術說明之中以供參照—— 揭示一種使用在圚鋸上的安全系統，以便在使用者的手接 5 本紙張尺度適財關家標準（CNS)A4規格（21Gx297公楚） 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 4 5 886 2 Α7 _ _ Β7 五、發明說明（$ ) 近到鋸片的時候停止該鋸片。這系統使用該鋸片作爲一個 電磁近接偵測器裏的天線，以便在使用者的手實際碰觸到 該锯片以前即可偵測出使用者的手接近到該鋸片。一旦偵 測出使用者的手的時候，該系統嚙合一個使用標準電磁閥 的剎車。不幸的是，此類系統很容易錯誤地觸發並且由於 是電磁閥的緣故，動作相對地較慢。美國專利編號4,1 1 7,7 5 2 此處也已納入其所揭τκ的內容以供參照-- 揭示一個類似的使用於帶鋸的剎車系統，在該系統之中， 剎車是由使用者的手與該鋸片的實際接觸來觸發的。然而 ，所描述的用於偵測鋸片接觸的系統顯然不能夠有效地達 到精確地和可靠地偵測出接觸。尤其，該系統依賴標準的 電磁刹車來操作切斷電源電壓以停止該鋸片和帶鋸的滑輪 。相信這種刹車將需要5 0毫秒至1秒的時間來停住該鋸 片。因而，該系統是太慢而不能夠快速地停止鋸片以避免 嚴重的傷害。 這些現有的系統配合普通常用的動力工具機使用，它 們之中沒有一個能夠具有足夠快的速度和/或充分的可靠 度以防止嚴重的傷害。雖然，近接型的感測器能夠被用在 —些設備之中，以增加停止移動物件的可用時間，在許多 案例裏，在正常的操作過程中，使用者的手必須伸到相當 接近至機器的切削元件處。例如，許多類型的木工設備需 要使用者的手通過相當接近切割工具的地方。結果，現有 的近接型式之感測器一一它們是相對不精密的一一未能證 明能夠有效使用在這種類型的設備裏。即使在近接感測器 6 度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210 X 297公爱） ' \--------^---------^ (請先閱讀背面之注咅？事項再填窝本頁) 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 4 5 886 2 A7 B7 五、發明說明（zf ) 是實際可行的地方，在許多案例之中，現有的剎車系統也 還沒有足夠快的操作速度，以防止嚴重的傷害。 在近接型感測器還沒有證明是實際有效的設備裏’若 是使用者的手接觸到的時候’切削工具必須要非常快速地 停住以避免嚴重的傷害。舉例來說’使用者可能送入一件 木料以一個近似每秒一英呎的速率通過一桌鋸。假設平均 反應時間大約是十分之一秒’在甚至使用者還未察覺以前 ，手可能已經移動明顯超過一英吋。這個距離遠超過足以 造成損失許多個手指頭、切斷極爲重要的血管和筋腱、或 甚至完全切斷一隻手所需的距離。假如一接觸到鋸子的鋸 片的時候，一個剎車被立即觸發’該鋸片必須在大約百分 之一秒以內被停住，以限制傷害的深度不會超過八分之一 英吋。標準的電磁閥或其它電磁裝置大體上不是被設計用 來在這樣的時間尺度以內工作的，特別是’必須產生重大 作用力的場合。例如，在以6 Ο Η z的輸電線電源操作的 電磁閥或電磁刹車的案例裏，可能在觸發剎車的時候，該 電源是在一個低電壓的相位，甚至在電壓到達足夠高的水 平以開始實際移動刹車以前，已經經歷了許多毫秒，而距 離達成將該鋸片或切削工具完全停住的目標還非遙遠。 <隨附圖式之簡單說明> 圖1係依據本發明帶有快速作用之安全止動機構的機 器之示意圖。 圖2係依據本發明快速作用之安全止動機構的接觸偵 測系統和剎車系統的示意圖。 7 本紙張尺度適用中國國豕標準 (CNS)A4規格（2】〇 X 297公爱） (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 訂·' 線· 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 45 88 6 2 A7 ______B7_ 五、發明說明（$ ) 圖3係依據本發明範例的第一電氣系統、第二電氣系 統、和點火裝置系統的電路示意圖。 圖4係依據本發明安裝在柄軸上的鋸片之剖面視圖。 圖5係依據本發明之可供選用的充電板的剖面視圖。 圖6係依據本發明之可供選用的第一電氣系統、第二 電氣系統'和點火裝置系統的電路示意圖。 圖7係依據本發明可熔式構件之另一可供選用的配置 的側視圖。 圖8係依據圖7之另一可供選用之配置的前視圖。 圖9係一流程圖’說明依據本發明一範例的控制邏輯 接通電源的順序。 圖1 Q係一剖面詳圖，說明一個使用依據本發明之爆 炸裝塡的剎車系統。 圖11係依據本發明可供選用的本發明之掣爪架構的 示意圖。 圖12係依據本發明可供選用的本發明之掣爪架構的 示意圖。 圖1 3係依據本發明可供選用的本發明之掣爪架構的 示意圖。 圖14係依據本發明可供選用的本發明之掣爪架構的 示意圖。 圖1 5係依據本發明一範例的掣爪架構之詳圖，該掣 爪可自動地偵測正確的刀葉對掣爪的間隔。 圖16係本發明另一可供選用的掣爪的側視圖。 8 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210 X 297公釐） (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 訂 -線· 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 458862 A7 ----- --- B7_____ 五、發明說明（^ ) 圖1 7係圖1 6之可供選用的掣爪架構的俯視圖。 圖1 8係就桌鋸而言，依據本發明的安全止動機構之 範例型實施例的側面立視圖。 圖19係依據本發明的盒式安全止動機構的詳細視圖 0 圖2 0係就斜切鋸而論，依據本發明的安全止動機構 之範例型實施例的側面立視圖 圖2 1係沿著圖2 0之剖切線2 1 — 2 1截取的俯視 剖面視圖。 圖2 2係圖2 0的安全止動機構之另一可供選用之實 施例，其中，該斜切鋸之鋸片係被設計成當受到掣爪的阻 擋時，該斜切鋸的鋸片向上擺動。 圖2 3係就旋臂鋸而論，本發明之安全止動機構的範 例型實施例的側視立面圖。 圖2 4係就圓鋸而論，本發明安全止動機構之範例型 實施例的側視圖。 圖2 5係就帶鋸而論，本發明安全止動機構之範例型 實施例的側視圖。 圖2 6係沿著圖2 5之剖切線2 6 - 2 6截取的剖面 視圖’說明依據本發明可供選用的充電板設計。 圖2 7係依據本發明之另一可供選用的剎車系統的示 意圖。 圖2 8係就接縫刨刀而論，依據本發明的安全止動機 構之範例型實施例的側視圖。 9 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（21〇 X 297公楚） _---------訂---------線--- (請先閲讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 45 88 6 2 五、發明說明（q ) <圖號說明> 1 0 12 14 16 18 2 0 2 2 3 0 3 2 3 4 3 8 4〇 4 2 4 4 4 6 4 8 5 0 5 2 5 4 6 0 6 2 6 4 6 6 A7 B7 機器 馬達組合件 切削工具 電磁接觸器 啓動開關 停止開關 電源 安全止動機構 接觸檢測系統 刹車系統 第一電氣系統 反相器 反相器 電容器 1 0 0仟歐姆電阻器 10仟歐姆電阻器 10仟歐姆電阻器 反相器 2仟歐姆串接電阻器 帶有屏蔽作用之電纜線 充電板 鋸片 第二充電板 ------------卜.Λ---------訂---------線 (請先閲讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210 X 297公釐） 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印制衣 45 88 6 2 五、發明說明（ 6 8 7 0 7 2 7 4 7 6 7 7 7 8 7 9 8 0 8 1 8 2 8 3 8 4 8 5 8 6 8 8 9 0 9 1 9 2 9 4 9 6 9 7 9 8 10 0 A7 B7 絕緣分隔器 心軸 塑膠襯套 絕緣墊圏 絕緣墊圏 插銷 心軸凸緣 軸承 心軸墊圈 心軸活動塊 心軸螺帽 皮帶 絕緣襯套 固定座 滑輪 第二電氣系統 帶有屏蔽作用之電纜線 電壓分壓器 1兆歐姆電阻器 1兆歐姆電阻器 運算放大器 參考電壓線源 10仟歐姆電位器 1 0仟歐姆電阻器 11 --------- 衣--------訂---------線— (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁). 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210 X 297公釐） 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 45 88 S 2 1 A7 ___B?___ 五、發明說明（I ) 102 10仟歐姆電阻器 1 0 4 0.4 7微法拉電容器 106 充電電路 115 點火系統 116 10仟歐姆電阻器 117 充電電路 118 電晶體 1 1 9 0.4 7微法拉電容器 1 2 0 電荷儲存裝置 122 可熔斷構件 1 2 4 1 0 0歐姆電阻器 13 0 彈簧 13 2 線圈 13 4 螺栓 136 接觸線柱 140 剎車掣爪 141 樞轉臂 1 4 2 帶肩螺栓 1 0 8 2 4微微法拉電容器 110 二極體 112 1 0 0仟歐姆放電電阻器 114 運算放大器 1 5 0 爆炸裝藥 164 觸發引線 —-#--------t--------- (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210 X 297公釐） 458862 五、發明說明（ί& ) 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 1 6 6 固定塊 1 7 0 接觸頭 1 7 2 槓桿臂 1 7 4 插銷 1 7 6 連桿 1 8 〇 掣爪 1 8 2 斜面部 1 8 4 平行臂 1 8 6 電容器板 1 8 8 導電引線 2 〇 0 狹長掣爪 2 0 2 接觸表面 2 0 3 下樞轉臂 2 0 4 樞轉臂 2 0 5 樞轉銷 2 0 6 樞轉銷 2 0 9 樞轉銷 2 1 0 樞轉銷 2 1 2 彈簧 2 2 〇 擺動臂 2 2 2 軸桿 2 2 4 蝸輪 2 2 8 托架 2 2 9 金屬箔 -\-------I ^---------線 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 本紙張&度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210 X 297公釐） 46 886 2 a7 _____ B7 五、發明說明U1 )458362 A7 B7 --- 1 -------- V. Description of the invention (ί> < Field of invention > (Please read the notes on the back before filling this page) The present invention relates to security systems, and More specifically, it relates to the high-speed safety stop mechanism used in power equipment. ≪ Background of the Invention > Beginning with the industrial revolution and continuing to this day, compared with _ manual tools, mechanized equipment has allowed workers to Higher speeds and less labor to produce products. Unfortunately, the power and high operating speed of mechanized equipment poses danger to those who operate such machines. Thousands of people are affected every year by accidents involving power equipment Disability or loss of life. Line-As expected, many systems have been developed to minimize the risk of injury when using power equipment. Perhaps the most common safety function is a protective device, the protective device Prevents operators from physically touching dangerous parts of the machine, such as belts, shafts, or blades. In many cases, protective devices can effectively reduce injuries However, there are many examples in which the work to be performed essentially eliminates the use of protective devices that can completely block the access to dangerous machine components. The Intellectual Property Bureau, Ministry of Economic Affairs, Employee Consumption Cooperatives has printed various systems It is proposed that it can be used to prevent accidental injuries in situations where the protective device cannot be effectively used. For example, U.S. Patent Nos. 9 4 1, 726 '2,978,084' 3,011,610 '3,047, 1 16, 4,195,722, and 4,321,841, etc., these patents- Their disclosures have been incorporated here for reference-all reveal safety systems for use with power presses. These systems utilize cables connected to the operator's wrist that connect the user while the machine is operating The hand is pulled back from the work area, or the operation of the machine is blocked until the user's 4 paper standards are applicable to the national standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) 88 β 2 Α7 Β7 V. Description of the invention ( >) until your hand leaves the danger zone. US Patent Nos .: 3,9 5 3,7 7 0, 4,075,9 6 1 '4,470,046' 4,532,501 (Please read the back first Please fill in this page again for your attention), and 5, 2 1 2, 6 2 1-the disclosures have been incorporated here for reference-revealing radio frequency safety systems, these safety systems use radio frequency signals to Detect the presence of the user's hand in the danger zone of the machine 'and block or interrupt the operation of the machine once found. US Patent Nos. 4,959,909, 5,025,175, 5,122,091' 5,198,702 '5,201,684' 5,272,946, and 5,510,685 indicate coordinated meat Safety systems for product peeling equipment, which have been incorporated into this technical note 'for reference. These systems interrupt or reverse power to the machine when the user's hand touches any dangerous part of the machine, or releases the clutch from the engaged state. In general, the contact between the user and the machine is detected by monitoring the electrical contact between the thin metal mesh provided in the gloves worn by the user and certain metal elements in the danger zone of the machine. Although such systems are suitable for use with meat peeling machines, they are relatively slow in stopping the movement of the machine's cutting elements because they rely on the operation of a solenoid valve or have to overcome the inertia of the motor Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs. However, because these systems operate at relatively low speeds, the blade does not need to be stopped quickly to prevent serious injury to the user. US Patent Nos. 3,7 85,230 and 4,026,177 — disclosed by this patent Has been incorporated into this technical note for reference-revealing a security system for use on a jigsaw to allow users to hand 5 paper sizes (CNS) A4 (21Gx297) ) Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 4 5 886 2 Α7 _ _B7 V. Description of the invention ($) Stop the saw blade when it comes to the blade. This system uses the saw blade as an antenna in an electromagnetic proximity detector, so that the user's hand can approach the saw blade before the user's hand actually touches the saw blade. Once the user's hand is detected, the system engages a brake using a standard solenoid valve. Unfortunately, such systems are easily triggered by mistake and are relatively slow because they are solenoid valves. U.S. Patent No. 4,1 1 7,7 5 2 The content of its disclosed τκ has also been incorporated here for reference-revealing a similar brake system for band saws, in which the brakes are used by The user's hand is triggered by actual contact with the saw blade. However, the described system for detecting blade contact obviously cannot effectively and accurately detect contact. In particular, the system relies on standard electromagnetic brakes to operate by cutting off the power supply voltage to stop the saw blade and the pulley of the band saw. It is believed that this braking will take 50 milliseconds to 1 second to stop the blade. Thus, the system is too slow to stop the blade quickly to avoid serious injury. These existing systems are used in conjunction with commonly used power tools, none of which are fast enough and / or reliable enough to prevent serious injuries. Although proximity sensors can be used in some devices to increase the available time to stop moving objects, in many cases, during normal operation, the user's hand must reach quite close to the machine Cutting elements. For example, many types of woodworking equipment require the user's hand to pass fairly close to the cutting tool. As a result, existing proximity sensors, which are relatively imprecise, have failed to prove that they can be effectively used in this type of device. Applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 public love) even at proximity sensor 6 degrees' \ -------- ^ --------- ^ (Please read the back first Note to note? Matters will be refilled on this page) Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 4 5 886 2 A7 B7 V. The invention description (zf) is practical and feasible. In many cases, the existing brake system Nor is it fast enough to prevent serious injuries. In devices where the proximity sensor has not proven to be effective, the cutting tool must be stopped very quickly to avoid serious injury if it is touched by the user's hand. For example, a user may feed a piece of wood through a table saw at a rate of approximately one foot per second. Assuming that the average response time is about one-tenth of a second ', the hand may have moved significantly more than one inch before the user even noticed it. This distance is far enough to cause the loss of many fingers, to cut off vital blood vessels and tendons, or even to cut off one hand completely. If it comes into contact with the blade of the saw, a brake is triggered immediately. The blade must be stopped within about a hundredth of a second to limit the depth of the injury to no more than one-eighth of an inch. Standard solenoid valves or other solenoid devices are generally not designed to operate within such time scales, especially where a significant force must be generated. For example, in the case of a solenoid valve or electromagnetic brake operated with a power line power supply of 60 Η z, the power may be in a low voltage phase when the brake is triggered, or even when the voltage reaches a sufficiently high level to start Many milliseconds have elapsed before actually moving the brakes, and the goal of completely stopping the saw blade or cutting tool is not far away. < Brief description of accompanying drawings > Fig. 1 is a schematic diagram of a machine with a quick-acting safety stop mechanism according to the present invention. Fig. 2 is a schematic diagram of a contact detection system and a braking system of a fast-acting safety stop mechanism according to the present invention. 7 This paper size is in accordance with China National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (2) 0X 297 public love) (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) System 45 88 6 2 A7 ______B7_ V. Description of the invention ($) FIG. 3 is a schematic circuit diagram of the first electrical system, the second electrical system, and the ignition device system according to an example of the present invention. Fig. 4 is a sectional view of a saw blade mounted on a arbor according to the present invention. FIG. 5 is a cross-sectional view of an optional charging pad according to the present invention. Fig. 6 is a schematic circuit diagram of an alternative first electrical system, a second electrical system 'and an ignition system according to the present invention. Fig. 7 is a side view of another alternative configuration of a fusible member according to the present invention. FIG. 8 is a front view of another alternative configuration according to FIG. 7. Fig. 9 is a flowchart 'illustrating the sequence of turning on the power by the control logic according to an example of the present invention. Fig. 1 is a detailed cross-sectional view illustrating a brake system using an explosive device according to the present invention. FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram of an alternative pawl structure of the present invention according to the present invention. FIG. 12 is a schematic diagram of an alternative pawl structure of the present invention according to the present invention. FIG. 13 is a schematic diagram of an alternative pawl structure of the present invention according to the present invention. Fig. 14 is a schematic diagram of an alternative pawl structure of the present invention according to the present invention. Figure 15 is a detailed view of a claw structure according to an example of the present invention. The claw can automatically detect the correct blade-to-claw interval. Figure 16 is a side view of another alternative pawl of the present invention. 8 This paper size applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) (Please read the precautions on the back before filling out this page) Order-Line · Printed by the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs and Consumer Cooperatives 458862 A7- ---- --- B7_____ V. Description of the invention (^) Figure 17 is a top view of the optional pawl structure shown in Figure 16. Fig. 18 is a side elevation view of an exemplary embodiment of a safety stop mechanism according to the present invention in terms of a table saw. Fig. 19 is a detailed view of a cassette type safety stop mechanism according to the present invention. Fig. 20 is a side elevation view of an exemplary embodiment of a safety stop mechanism according to the present invention in terms of a miter saw. A top cross-sectional view taken along a cutting line 2 1-2 1 of FIG. 20. FIG. 22 is another alternative embodiment of the safety stop mechanism of FIG. 20, wherein the blade of the miter saw is designed to prevent the blade of the miter saw from being blocked by the claw. Swing up. Fig. 23 is a side elevational view of an exemplary embodiment of a safety stop mechanism of the present invention in terms of a rotary arm saw. Fig. 24 is a side view of an exemplary embodiment of the safety stop mechanism of the present invention in terms of a circular saw. Fig. 25 is a side view of an exemplary embodiment of the safety stop mechanism of the present invention in terms of a band saw. Fig. 26 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line 2-6-26 of Fig. 25, illustrating the design of an optional charging board according to the present invention. Fig. 27 is a schematic view of another alternative braking system according to the present invention. Fig. 28 is a side view of an exemplary embodiment of a safety stop mechanism according to the present invention in terms of a seam planer. 9 This paper size is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (21〇X 297). _--------- Order --------- Line --- (Please read the back first Please fill in this page again) Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 45 88 6 2 V. Description of Invention (q) < Illustration of Drawing Number > 1 0 12 14 16 18 2 0 2 2 3 0 3 2 3 4 3 8 4〇4 2 4 4 4 6 4 8 5 0 5 2 5 4 6 0 6 2 6 4 6 6 A7 B7 machine motor assembly cutting tool electromagnetic contactor start switch stop switch power supply safety stop mechanism contact detection System braking system First electrical system Inverter Inverter capacitor 1 0 0 ohm resistor 10 ohm resistor 10 ohm resistor 10 ohm resistor inverter 2 ohm series resistor cable charging board with shielding effect The second charging board of the saw blade ------------ Bu.Λ --------- Order --------- Wire (Please read the precautions on the back first (Fill in this page) This paper size is in accordance with China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm). Clothing printed by employees ’cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 45 88 6 2 V. Description of the invention (6 8 7 0 7 2 7 4 7 6 7 7 7 8 7 9 8 0 8 1 8 2 8 3 8 4 8 5 8 6 8 8 9 0 9 1 9 2 9 4 9 6 9 7 9 8 10 0 A7 B7 Insulation separator mandrel plastic bushing Insulation pad 圏 Insulation pad 圏 Bolt Mandrel flange bearing mandrel washer mandrel movable block mandrel nut belt insulation bushing fixed pulley second electrical system cable line voltage divider with shielding function 1 megaohm resistor 1 megaohm resistor operational amplifier Reference voltage line source 10 仟 ohm potentiometer 1 0 仟 ohm resistor 11 --------- clothing -------- order --------- line — (Please read first Note on the back, please fill in this page again.) This paper size applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 45 88 S 2 1 A7 ___ B? ___ V. Description of the invention (I) 102 10 仟 ohm resistor 1 0 4 0.4 7 microfarad capacitor 106 charging circuit 115 ignition system 116 10 仟 ohm resistor 117 charging circuit 118 transistor 1 1 9 0.4 7 microfarad capacitor 1 2 0 charge storage Device 122 Fusible element 1 2 4 1 0 0 Ohm resistor 13 0 Spring 13 2 Coil 13 4 Bolt 136 Contact post 14 0 Brake pawl 141 Pivot arm 1 4 2 Shoulder bolt 1 0 8 2 4 Pico farad capacitor 110 Diode 112 1 0 0 Ohm discharge resistor 114 Operational amplifier 1 5 0 Explosive charge 164 Trigger lead —- # -------- t --------- (Please read the notes on the back before filling out this page) This paper size is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) 458862 V. Description of invention (ί &) Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 1 6 6 Fixing block 1 7 0 Contact head 1 7 2 Lever arm 1 7 4 Latch 1 7 6 Connecting rod 1 8 〇Claw 1 8 2 Inclined section 1 8 4 Parallel arm 1 8 6 Capacitor plate 1 8 8 Conductive lead 2 〇0 Slim pawl 2 0 2 Contact surface 2 0 3 Lower pivot arm 2 0 4 Pivot arm 2 0 5 Pivot pin 2 0 6 Pivot pin 2 0 9 Pivot pin 2 1 0 Pivot pin 2 1 2 Spring 2 2 〇 Swing arm 2 2 2 Shaft 2 2 4 Worm gear 2 2 8 Bracket 2 2 9 Metal foil-\ ---- --- I ^ --------- line (please read the precautions on the back before filling out this page) This paper & degree applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) 886 2 a7 ___ __ B7 V. Invention Description U1)
經濟部智慧財產局員工消費<!〇乍if S 2 3 0 螺栓 2 3 6 壓縮彈簧 2 3 8 彈簧座 2 4 0 接觸線柱 2 4 2 電子裝置單元 2 4 4 電源電纜線 2 4 6 掣動盒 2 4 8 殼體 2 5 0 螺栓 2 5 2 肩形凸出物 2 5 4 斜面 2 5 6 電氣連接器 2 5 8 栓塞 2 6 0 電纜線 2 6 2 開孔 2 7 0 斜切鋸. 2 7 2 底座 2 7 4 擺動臂 2 7 5 擺動臂 2 7 6 殼體 2 7 7 活動門 2 7 8 握把 2 8 0 觸發器 2 8 2 安裝座 14 -----*"--------訂---------線 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210 X 297公釐） 4 5 88 6 ^ A7 _____B7 五、發明說明（^) 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 2 8 4 螺栓 2 8 6 樞轉螺栓 2 9 2 彈簧 2 9 4 固定座 2 9 6 凸出部 2 9 8 凸緣 3 0 0 端部 3 0 2 端部 3 1 0 旋臂鋸 3 1 2 水平底座 3 1 4 垂直支柱 3 1 6 導引臂 3 1 8 滑座 3 2 〇 鋸子殻體 3 2 2 馬達組合件 3 2 4 樞轉掣爪組合件 3 2 8 掣爪 3 3 〇 致動器 3 3 2 可鎖定捲筒組合件 3 3 4 彈簧作動捲筒 3 3 6 繫繩 3 3 8 掣爪 3 4 0 手持式圓鋸 3 4 2 殻體 15 -------------^--------訂---------線 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 本紙張尺度適用令國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210^ 297公釐）Staff Consumption of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs <! 〇 If S 2 3 0 Bolt 2 3 6 Compression spring 2 3 8 Spring seat 2 4 0 Contact post 2 4 2 Electronic unit 2 4 4 Power cable 2 4 6 Switch Moving box 2 4 8 Housing 2 5 0 Bolt 2 5 2 Shoulder protrusion 2 5 4 Bevel 2 5 6 Electrical connector 2 5 8 Plug 2 6 0 Cable 2 6 2 Cutout 2 7 0 Miter saw. 2 7 2 Base 2 7 4 Swing arm 2 7 5 Swing arm 2 7 6 Housing 2 7 7 Sliding door 2 7 8 Grip 2 8 0 Trigger 2 8 2 Mount 14 ----- * "- ------ Order --------- Line (Please read the precautions on the back before filling out this page) This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) 4 5 88 6 ^ A7 _____B7 V. Description of the invention (^) Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 2 8 4 Bolts 2 8 6 Pivot bolts 2 9 2 Springs 2 9 4 Fixtures 2 9 6 Projections 2 9 8 Flange 3 0 0 End 3 0 2 End 3 1 0 Rotary arm saw 3 1 2 Horizontal base 3 1 4 Vertical post 3 1 6 Guide arm 3 1 8 Slide 3 2 〇 Saw housing 3 2 2 Motor Assembly 3 2 4 Pivot Claw assembly 3 2 8 Paw 3 3 〇 Actuator 3 3 2 Lockable reel assembly 3 3 4 Spring-operated reel 3 3 6 Tether 3 3 8 Paw 3 3 0 Hand-held circular saw 3 4 2 Case 15 ------------- ^ -------- Order --------- Line (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) Paper size applies the national standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 ^ 297 mm)
A7 B7 導引板 伸縮鋸片防護裝置 帶鋸 主殻體 轉輪 切割區 上鋸條導引組合件 下鋸條導引組合件 工作檯 充電板安裝座 彈簧 爆炸型纜線切割裝置 比較器 1兆歐姆電阻器 1兆歐姆電阻器 低電壓供給源 1兆歐姆電阻器 1 0 0微微法拉電容器 2 7仟歐姆電阻器 3 .3仟歐姆電阻器 1仟歐姆電阻器 2 2仟歐姆電阻器 2 2仟歐姆電阻器 第二比較器 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) . 線- 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210 x 297公釐） 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費^乍£^兑 45 88 6 ,. A7 __B7__五、發明說明（丨卞） 422 參考電壓源 4 2 4 1 0仟歐姆電位器 4 2 6 1 0 0仟歐姆電阻器 4 2 8 1 0 0仟歐姆電阻器 4 3 0 0.1微法拉電容器 431 ηρη型雙極結型電晶體 4 3 2 1 0 0仟歐姆電阻器 4 3 4 2 2 0微微法拉電容器 4 3 6 6 8 0歐姆電阻器 438 矽可控整流器 Η V 高電壓供給源 440 電氣供給系統 4 4 2 1 0 0歐姆電阻器 444 二極體 4 4 6 1 0 0 0微法拉電荷儲存電容器 448 12仟歐姆電阻器 450 二極體 4 5 2 0.1微法拉電容器 454 可調式穩壓器 456 1仟歐姆電阻器 458 22仟歐姆電阻器 4 6 0 5 0微法拉電容器 470 彈簧塊 4 7 2 鉤子 _^--------訂---------線 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210 X 297公釐） A7 45 8862 五、發明說明（ίΓ) 474 高壓接觸線柱 476 放電接觸線柱 478 一段可熔斷橇件 479 絕緣層 5 0 0 接縫刨刀 5 0 2 刀頭 5 0 4 心軸 506 主框架組合件 508 進料檯 510 出料檯 5 12 刀葉 5 14 襯套 5 2 0 平板 5 2 2 滑塊 524 接觸線柱 5 2 9 溝槽 530 可撓曲薄片狀材料 5 3 2 鉤子； <發明之詳細說明> 圖1係不意地說明本發明之機器，該機器整體是以參 考編號1 0代表。該機器1 〇包括有一個適於用來驅動一 切削工具1 4的馬達組合件1 2。馬達組合件1 2包括有 一個或多個馬達，其中至少一個馬達係適於用來傳動切削 工具1 4的。譬如，機器1 〇可以包括有〜個或多個適於A7 B7 Guide plate telescopic blade protection device Band saw main housing Runner cutting area Upper saw blade guide assembly Lower saw blade guide assembly Workbench charging plate mount Spring explosive cable cutting device comparator 1 megaohm resistor 1 megaohm resistor low voltage supply source 1 megaohm resistor 1 0 0 pico farad capacitor 2 7 ohm resistor 3 .3 ohm resistor 1 ohm resistor 2 2 ohm resistor 2 2 ohm resistor Second comparator (please read the precautions on the back before filling this page). LINE-This paper size is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 x 297 mm). Employees of Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs ^ ^ / 45 88 6,. A7 __B7__ V. Description of the invention (丨 卞) 422 Reference voltage source 4 2 4 1 0 仟 ohm potentiometer 4 2 6 1 0 0 仟 ohm resistor 4 2 8 1 0 0 仟 ohm resistor 4 3 0 0.1 microfarad capacitor 431 ηρη bipolar junction transistor 4 3 2 1 0 0 仟 ohm resistor 4 3 4 2 2 0 picofarad capacitor 4 3 6 6 8 0 ohm resistor 438 silicon controlled rectifier Η V High voltage supply source 440 Electrical supply system 4 4 2 1 0 0 Ohm resistor 444 Diode 4 4 6 1 0 0 0 Microfarad charge storage capacitor 448 12 仟 Ohm resistor 450 Diode 4 5 2 0.1 Microfarad capacitor 454 Adjustable voltage regulator 456 1 仟 Ohm resistor 458 22 仟 ohm resistor 4 6 0 5 0 microfarad capacitor 470 spring block 4 7 2 hook _ ^ -------- order --------- line (please read the precautions on the back first) (Fill in this page again.) This paper size is in accordance with Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) A7 45 8862. 5. Description of the invention (ίΓ) 474 High-voltage contact line post 476 Discharge contact line post 478 One piece of fusible skid 479 Insulation layer 5 0 0 Joint planer 5 0 2 Head 5 0 4 Mandrel 506 Main frame assembly 508 Feeder table 510 Feeder table 5 12 Blade 5 14 Bushing 5 2 0 Flat plate 5 2 2 Slider 524 Contact post 5 2 9 Groove 530 Flexible sheet-like material 5 3 2 Hook; < Detailed description of the invention > Fig. 1 is an accidental illustration of the machine of the present invention, which is represented by reference numeral 10 as a whole. The machine 10 includes a motor assembly 12 adapted to drive a cutting tool 14. The motor assembly 12 includes one or more motors, at least one of which is adapted to drive the cutting tool 14. For example, the machine 10 may include one or more suitable
1S 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210 X 297公釐） I. K I n f— n I I f— I r * n ti n m n ·*--^· I» n ft n t— I l> I— FL (請先閲讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作钍印則^ 4 5 88 6 ^ A7 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合阼'Fi.:psc: -------—B7 五、發明說明（丨b) 兩來帶動切削工具14的馬達和一個或多個適於用來輸送 像是木材類的工件的馬達，以便使工件接觸到切削工具工 4。切削工具1 4 一般包括有一個或多個刀具葉片或其它 適於切削的器具，這些器具係適於從工件上切割或移除局 部材料。切削工具1 4的特殊形式將視機器丄〇的種種不 同具體實施例而有變化。譬如，對於桌鋸、破碎斜切鋸 (chop and miter saw)、圓錦、和旋臂鋸等，它們的切削工具 1 4一般將包括有一個圓形的旋轉鋸片，這種旋轉鋸片的 周圍邊緣具有複數個館齒。接縫刨刀（jointer)或刨床的 切削工具14則包括有複數個沿著半徑方向間隔設置的鋸 片。帶鋸的切削工具1 4則包括有一個狹長且係環形而帶 有銷齒的鋸帶。 在馬達組合件1 2和電源2 2之間設置有一個控制器 ’該控制器大體上多包括有一個或多個開關，用來啓動和 停止該機器的操作。如圖所示，該控制器的形式上係爲一 個電磁接觸器1 6，該電磁接觸器1 6包括有啓動和停止 開關1 8及2 0。一個適當的啓動開關2 0的例子是瞬間 接觸開關，這種開關在操作時建立起一個電路而閉合該接 觸器。當接觸器被閉合的時候，電力被輸送到馬達裏。接 觸器包括有一個內部開關，該內部開關在一旦接觸器被閉 合時可保持電路不中斷。一種常閉式瞬間開關是一個適當 的停止開關2 2之例子，這種常閉式瞬間開關在操作的時 候，會中斷維持接觸器閉合的電路，藉此停止馬達的運轉 。從本文中將可體會到：以上的說明只是用來提供一個此 19 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)/y規格（210 X 297公釐） (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) - 訂： --線· A7 45g8>S2 ______B7____— _ 五、發明說明（/)) 類接觸器的舉例性質之例子’而任何其它可用來啓動和停 止機器操作的適當接觸器像是固態晶體裝置等都可以被使 用。 機器1 0包括有一個安全止動機構3 0，這個安全止 動機構3 0會在切削工具和使用者身體發生接觸的瞬間突 然地停止切削工具。當在本文中使用「真正一瞬間地」、 「立即地」、「突然地」、「快速地」、「即刻地」、和 「馬上」等，它們意指在正常的機器操作過程中（也就是 說：在使用者依其意願以正常的進給速度操作機器）’快 得足以能夠防止對使用者造成嚴重的傷害，像是切斷使用 者的一個或多個手指頭。使用本發明的安全止動機構從切 削刀具初步接觸到使用者開始到停止的時間少於1〇個毫 秒是較佳的，而停止時間少於5毫秒或更佳的2毫秒則是 更想要的或是有可能達到的。另外.，當在正常使闬條件下 ，長的停止時間依然可防止嚴重的傷害的時候，這種安全 止動機構停止機器的時間可以是較長的，譬如是：2 0、 5 0或1 0 0毫秒等即已足夠。 如同以下將會更詳細地說明，安全止動機構3 〇包括 有兩個主要的子系統，一個是接觸檢測系統3 2 ’而另一 個是刹車系統3 4。該接觸檢測系統3 2監控著切削刀具 與使用者的接觸。在偵知到此類的接觸發生的時候’接觸 檢測系統3 2觸發刹車系統3 4。爲了回應這種由接觸檢 測系統.3 2的激發動作，刹車系統3 4突然地停止了切削 刀具（或採取其它動作以消除發生傷害的危險）。 20 (請先間讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 訂：1S This paper size is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) I. KI nf— n II f— I r * n ti nmn · *-^ · I »n ft nt— I l > I— FL (Please read the notes on the back before filling out this page) Seal of Consumption Cooperation of Employees of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs ^ 4 5 88 6 ^ A7 Employee Consumption of Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs' Fi.:psc:- -------- B7 V. Description of the invention (丨 b) Two motors that drive the cutting tool 14 and one or more motors suitable for conveying workpieces such as wood, so that the workpieces contact the cutting tools工 4. Cutting tools 1 4 generally include one or more tool blades or other appliances suitable for cutting, which are suitable for cutting or removing local materials from a workpiece. The particular form of the cutting tool 14 will vary depending on the various embodiments of the machine. For example, for table saws, chop and miter saws, circular brocades, and rotary-arm saws, etc., their cutting tools 14 will generally include a circular rotary saw blade. The peripheral edge has a plurality of hall teeth. The cutting tool 14 of a jointer or planer includes a plurality of saw blades spaced in a radial direction. The cutting tool 14 of the band saw includes a narrow, annular saw toothed belt. A controller is provided between the motor assembly 12 and the power source 22. The controller generally includes one or more switches for starting and stopping the operation of the machine. As shown in the figure, the controller is in the form of an electromagnetic contactor 16, and the electromagnetic contactor 16 includes start and stop switches 18 and 20. An example of a suitable start switch 20 is a momentary contact switch which, when in operation, establishes a circuit to close the contactor. When the contactor is closed, power is delivered to the motor. The contactor includes an internal switch that keeps the circuit open when the contactor is closed. A normally closed instantaneous switch is an example of a suitable stop switch 22. When this normally closed instantaneous switch is in operation, it interrupts the circuit that maintains the contactor closed, thereby stopping the operation of the motor. As you can see from this article: The above description is only used to provide a copy of this 19 paper size applicable to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) / y specification (210 X 297 mm) (Please read the precautions on the back before filling out this page )-Order:-Line · A7 45g8 & S2 ______B7____ — _ V. Example of the nature of the contactor of the invention (/)) Example of the nature of the contactor 'and any other suitable contactor that can be used to start and stop the operation of the machine is like a solid crystal Devices and the like can be used. The machine 10 includes a safety stop mechanism 30, which stops the cutting tool suddenly when the cutting tool comes into contact with the user's body. When used in this article, "real time", "immediately", "suddenly", "quickly", "immediately", and "immediately", they mean that during normal machine operation (also That is: when the user operates the machine at a normal feed rate as he wishes) 'fast enough to prevent serious injury to the user, such as cutting off one or more fingers of the user. With the safety stop mechanism of the present invention, the time from the initial contact of the cutting tool to the user's start to stop is preferably less than 10 milliseconds, and the stop time of less than 5 milliseconds or better is more desirable. Or it is possible to achieve. In addition, when the long stopping time can still prevent serious injuries under normal operating conditions, the safety stop mechanism can stop the machine for a long time, such as: 20, 50, or 1. 0 0 milliseconds is sufficient. As will be explained in more detail below, the safety stop mechanism 30 includes two main subsystems, one is a contact detection system 3 2 ′ and the other is a brake system 34. The contact detection system 32 monitors the contact of the cutting tool with the user. When such contact is detected, the contact detection system 32 triggers the brake system 34. In response to this actuation by the contact detection system 3.2, the brake system 34 suddenly stopped the cutting tool (or took other actions to eliminate the risk of injury). 20 (Please read the notes on the back before filling this page) Order:
;線丨IV 經濟部智慧財產局員Η消費合泎；iL甲Μ 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210 X 297公釐） Λ7 458862 ______B7_____ 五、發明說明（/#) (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 除了啓動刹車系統3 4，接觸檢測系統3 2較佳地也 中斷輸送到馬達組合件1 2裏的電力，或至少，中斷馬達 組合件裏傳動該切削刀具的傳動部份的電力。譬如’當機 器10設置有一個如同上述例子裏所描述的電磁接觸器的 時候，接觸檢測系統3 2可以被設計成將保持該電磁接觸 器的電路中斷，以致於連接到馬達的電力被中斷。應可由 本文中瞭解到：這個步驟是可依意願選用的’因爲中斷連 接到機器的馬達之電力對於在使用者觸及切削刀具的時候 防止對使用者造成嚴重傷害並不是必要的手段或足夠的防 護方法。因此，這個步驟的主要功用是要在刹車系統3 4 正停止切削刀具的旋轉運動或其它動作的時候，減少對馬 達組合件或傳動系統的傷害。 -線 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合昨设 由本說明將可理解到：接觸檢測系統3 2可以使用任 何一個或多個不同的方法來偵測在切削刀具與使用者身體 之間接觸或近接狀況的發生。有鑒於電子信號和電路的相 對較高的反應速度，適當的偵測方法包括：使用電氣線路 來偵測使用者和切削刀具之間的電子連接。熟悉本技術領 域之人士當已熟知：人體的電容量是大約爲3 〇 〇微微法 拉。結果’當使用者接觸到切削刀具1 4的時候，使用者 身體的電容被電氣上連接到切削刀具固有的電容，藉此， 產生一個大於單獨切削刀具固有電容的有效電容量。因此 ，接觸檢測系統3 2可以電氣上連接到切削刀具以量取它 的電容量，以致於所量取的電容量之任何實質變化將代表 使用者和切削刀具之間的接觸。上述之各種傳統技術之安 21 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210 X 297公爱） 45 8862 A7 B7 經濟部智慧財產居員工消費合作社印製 五、發明說明（丨1 ) 全系統也提供了種種方法來偵測這些可被用來觸發刹車系 統的接觸或近接情況。 圖2和圖3示意地說明一個電容性接觸感測偵察系統 3 2的特定例子。接觸檢測系統3 2包括有一個第一電氣 系統，其在架構上被設計成能夠產生輸入信號且經由切削 刀具在電容上被連接到一個架構上能偵測出該輸入信號的 第二電氣系統。在這種設計之中，切削刀具電容量的任何 變化會改變到達第二電氣系統的輸入信號。因而，在使用 者身體和切削刀具之間的接觸會引起第二電氣系統開始偵 測輸入信號的變化。 在該範例型之例子裏，接觸檢測系統3 2包括有一個[ 第一電氣系統3 8，該第一電氣系統3 8在架構上被設計 成能夠產生一個輸入信號。第一電氣系統3 8被連接到一 個安裝在接近一切削工具14但與該切削工具14相隔離 開的充電板6 2，在圖2裏，這個切削工具1 4是被顯示 爲一個鋸片6 4。充電板6 2在電容上被聯接到該鋸片上 ，其大小和位置係平行於該鋸片但與該鋸片分隔開。胃二 充電板6 6也被安裝靠近該鋸片，以便建立第二電容聯接 。充電板的數目、大小和位置可以隨意改變，它應被包括 在本發明之範圍以內。 圖2所示的裝置之效果是透過鋸片形成兩個串接的電 容器，在兩個電容器的匯接點的地方產生一個電容性分路 。因而輸入信號由充電板6 2經過鋸片被傳送到第二充 電板6 6。如同圖示一般，該範例型之接觸檢測系統3 2 22 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210x297公爱） I i III 11 I I 1' 农·---- I — —訂· 1 In I --- (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) ^58862 A7 -—__B7_______ 五、發明說明（yo ) 也包括有一個第二電氣系統8 8，該第二電氣系統8 8被 連接到第二充電板6 6，並且在架構上被設計成能夠偵測 出在第二充電板6 6所接收到的輸入信號中發生的變化。 當使用者碰觸到該鋸片的時候，使用者的身體之電容 量產生一個電容性負載在鋸片上。結果，在充電板和鋸片 之的電容性分路之大小被增大，藉此，減少到達第二充電 板6 6的電荷量。因此，當使用者接觸到該鋸片的時候， 通過該鋸片到達第二充電板6 6的輸入信號大小減小。如 同將被更詳細地討論到的，第二電氣系統8 8在架構上被 設計成能夠對這樣的輸入信號變化產生反應，而給予刹車 系統3 4—個輸出信號。 在某些案例之中，在使用者乾燥的皮膚和鋸片之間可 能有一個明顯的阻抗存在。這樣的阻抗可能會減少使用者 與該鋸片之間的電容性聯接。然而，當鋸片上的鋸齒穿透 使用者皮膚外層的時候，皮膚內部纖維的固有濕度將會減 少皮膚和鋸片接觸的阻抗，因而，在它們之間建立起一個 可靠的電氣連接。更有甚者，如同以下將說明的，第二電 氣系統8 8的靈敏度能夠按照意願來調整，以便能夠察覺 到輸入信號中即使是很輕微的改變。 雖然，此處說明一個用來偵測使用者和鋸片之間接觸 的範例型系統和方法，也有許多其它的系統和方法可供使 用，它們都應包括在本發明的範圍之中。譬如，該偵測系 統可以在使用者和鋸片之間發生接觸時測知人體的阻抗， 以測知這樣的接觸已然發生。作爲另一個例子，在靠近鋸 23 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210 X 297公釐） (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) ，線· 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 A7 458862 B7__ 五、發明說明（/|) (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 片的附近可以放送無線電波信號，以致於該使用者的身體 其作用有如一支天線，以便當使用者和鋸片發生接觸的時 候，改變經由該鋸片所收到的信號。相似地，藉由站立在 一塊信號傳輸氈上或穿戴一個發送器的方式，可以將信號 施加到使用者的身體上，而偵測系統能夠監控這種由接觸 或近接切削刀具所產生的信號之接收。 作爲另一個例子’可以如上所述一般使用一個近接偵 測器。因爲剎車系統3 4能夠在數個毫秒內停止該鋸片’ 這種近接偵測器可以被設定成只能夠在使用者極爲靠近該 鋸片的時候才能夠觸發安全系統。這將會讓使用者擺放靠 近鋸片的工件而不會觸發刹車系統。另一個例子是，上述 使用在切肉設備裏的金屬絲網手套偵測系統也可以用來達 成相同之目的。因此’將可理解到：雖然此處係描述一個 具有範例型的電容性接觸偵測系統之實施例，任何其它能 夠偵測使用者與鋸片接觸或靠近的適當方法都可以被使用 0 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 圖3說明一個第一電氣系統3 8和第二電氣系統8 8 的適當架構。然而’熟悉電氣技術領域之人士將可明白： 圖3所示的接觸檢測系統3 2之範例型架構只是許多可使 用的架構其中之一。因而’當會瞭解到：在本發明之範圍 以內可以使用任何適當的實施例或架構。 如圖3所示，第一電氣系統3 8包括有一個振盪器電 路，該振璗器電路能夠產生一個大約頻率爲2 0 0 k h z 和電壓振幅爲1 2伏特例如爲方形波信號的波形輸入信號 24 本·紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210=<297公爱） 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印制^ 4 5 8862 Α7 Β7 五、發明說明（>:) 。另一取代的方式是，第一電氣系統3 8可在架構上被設 計成能夠產生一個具有不同頻率和/或不同振幅和/或不 同波形的信號。該振盪器是由架構上爲雙穩態振盪器的C D 4 0 4 0之一對反相器4 0和4 2形成的。反相器4 0 的輸出被連接到一個1 0 〇微微法拉（P f )之電容器4 4上，該電容器4 4是經由一個1 〇 〇仟歐姆電阻器4 6 被連接到反相器4 2的輸入端。一個1 〇仟歐姆電阻器4 8將反相器4 2的輸出端連接到電容器4 4和1 0仟歐姆 電阻器4 8之間的接合點上。反相器4 2的輸出端被連接 到反相器4 0的輸入端。一個1 0仟歐姆電阻器5 0將反 相器4 0的輸出端連接到反相器5 2的輸入端，反相器5 2是被用來作爲一個輸出緩衝器，以驅迫輸入的波形信號 進入到鋸片上。2仟歐姆串接電阻器5 4的作用是利用將 信號的高頻成分予以衰減的方式來減少輸入信號裏面的瞬 間振盪^ 將可理解到：振盪器信號的特定形式可以變動，並且 有許多合適的波形和頻率可以使用。可以選用能夠使信號 /雜訊比達到最大的波形，譬如，可選用一個頻率，在該 頻率時人體有最低的阻抗，或相對於欲切割之工件人體具 有最局之電容量。另外'在本技術領域暴有許多已公開揭 示爲人熟知的各種不同振盪器電路，這些振盪電路也是很 適合用來產生輸入信號的。 由振盪器產生的輸入信號經由一根帶有屏蔽功能之電 纜線6 0被送往充電板6 2。帶有屏蔽作用之電纜線6 0 25 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210 Xϋ公釐） ^--------訂---------線—L (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 經濟部智慧財產局員Μ消費合作杜印製 4 5 88 〇 Α7 ------_Β7__ 五、發明說明（yj) 是用來將輸入信號和出現在操作環境之中的任何電氣雜訊 相隔離’以確保被送到充電板6 2上的是一個「乾淨的」 輸入信號。其它防止輸入信號中出現雜訊的方法也可以被 使用。更進一步的替代方式是：第二電氣系統8 8可以包 括有一個過濾器，以去除輸入信號裏的任何雜訊或其它會 被充電板6 6測出的電氣干擾信號。 一般而言，充電板與鋸片之間的間隔不是非常重要的 。然而’可能會想要將這些充電板與鋸片隔離開來一小段 被選定來減少鋸片對鋸片與充電板之間的電容量之偏轉效 應的距離。譬如，假如鋸片受到切削期間所產生的負荷之 影響而朝向其中之一塊充電板移動1/3 2英吋的時候， 對該充電板的電容量會即增加。因爲電容量是比例於充電 板之面積除以間隔距離，相對較大的分隔距離會減少一已 知之鋸片位移的栢對影響。相似地，將充電板放置在相對 較靠近鋸片的中心是較佳的方式，因爲鋸片在靠近它安裝 所在的心軸的部位其位移量爲最小。在大約1/ 3 2英时 至大約1/2英吋的範圍以內的距離已被證明是最有效的 ，雖然，在適當的條件下也可以採用在這個範圍以外的數 値。 在另一個替代性之具體實施例裏，至少其中一個充電 板可以包括有一個或多個安裝在靠近据片之充電器側邊上 面的絕緣分隔器6 8，像是如同圖2所示一般。絕緣分隔 器6 8 .的作用有如一個實際的阻擋物，可防止鋸片不會偏 轉太過於靠近該充電板。這在當充電板和鋸片之間的距離 26 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210 x 297公·釐） '· ^---------訂---------線 If、一 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 A7 B7 五、發明說明（ytj) 是相對較小的時候是特別有用的。分隔器6 8可以由任何 電氣絕緣材料製作成，這些材料包括：陶瓷、玻璃、等等 。在圖2所示的範例型實施例裏，絕緣分隔器6 8只覆蓋 充電板和鋸片之間的一小部份面積，結果，這些絕緣分隔 器6 8對於在鋸片和充電板之間的電容量只有相對很小的 影響。替代地，分隔器可以覆蓋一實質很大部份的空間， 或甚至覆蓋充電板和鋸片之間的整個空間。在後者的情形 之中，分隔器其作用，將至少部份地，有如在充電板和鋸 片的導體表面之間的絕緣物。因此，在鋸片和充電板之間 的電容量將視分隔器的介電常數而定。除了一個或多個安 裝在充電板和鋸片之間的分隔器6 8以外’柑反的分隔器 (圖中未顯示出來）可以被裝設在與充電板相對方向之鋸 片側邊上面，以防止該鋸片偏轉太過於離開這些充電板。 分隔器可以被設計成在鋸片的表面上滑動’以致於這些充 電板會隨著鋸片的任何偏轉動作而移動。這種安排的好處 是：可以建立和保持一緊密的間隔，藉此，減少充電板的 大小。 這將可理解到：充電板6 2和6 6的大小也可以改變 。一般充電板面積是在1和1 0平方英吋之間，然而，許 多其它不同的大小尺寸也可以被使用，包括：超出這個範 圍以外的大小尺寸。一個適當充電板材料的例子是：鍍銅 之印刷電路板，這種材料是相對較爲堅硬並且較爲薄的。 其它的例子包括有：任何較能導電之導體材料像是金、鋁 、黃銅、鋼等等。在有大的接地金屬結構體靠近鋸片的地 27 ---------訂----------線 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 本紙張尺度適用111國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210 X 297公釐） 45 88 6 2 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印t A7 B7 五、發明說明（*^) 方，可以採用較大的驅動充電板6 2來部份地屏蔽鋸片， 防止與接地結構體產生電容性的聯接。雖然，較大充電板 也將對接地結構體有增加的電容性聯接，這不會千擾到該 系統的操作，因爲第一電氣系統3 8能夠驅動遠超過在這 些環境之下所產生的電容量。 如同以上的說明，輸入信號經由鋸片6 4從充電板6 2傳送到第二充電板6 6。如同圖3所示，在第二充電板 6 6上面所接收到的信號然後經由一條帶有屏蔽作用之電 纜線9 0被送到第二電氣系統8 8。該第二電氣系統8 8 在架構上被設計成能夠偵測出由於使用者身體和鋸片的接 觸而在信號產生的改變。將可由本說明理解到：第二電氣 系統8 8在實行上可以有許多不同的設計和架構。在圖3 所示的具體實施例裏’第二電氣系統8 8將第二充電板6 6所接收到的輸入信號之振幅與一個已被確定的參考電壓 相比較。假如，在第二充電板6 6收到的輸入信號低於參 考電壓一段時間，第二電氣系統8 8會產生一個輸出信號 到剎車系統3 4。該刹車系統3 4在架構上係被設計成能 夠接收這個輸出信號，並且立即開始作用，而停止鋸片的 動作。 第二電氣系統8 8的特定元件可以隨著許多不同的因 素而改變’這些因素包括用途、所想要有的靈敏度、元件 的可取得性、可利用的動力類別等等。在該範例型之具體 實施例裏，一條帶有屏蔽作闬之電纜線9 〇是被連接在第 —充電板6 6和一個電壓分壓器g 之間。電壓分壓器9 28 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格⑵Ο X 297^57 ^--------訂---------線---Γ (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合泎；±i.:psa 45 88 β 2 Α7 ______Β7___ 五'發明說明（yL) 1是由兩個1兆歐姆電阻器9 2 ' 9 4串聯在電壓供給源 (―般係大約1 2伏特大小）和地線之間構成的°電壓分 壓器9 1的功能是將來自第二充電板6 6的輸出信號加偏 壓使達到電壓供給源的一半大小。被加以偏壓的信號被送 到一個運算放大器9 6的正極輸入端。運算放大器9 6可 以是在該技術領域中早已爲人熟知的許多運算放大器其中 任何一種。此類運算放大器的一個例子是一個T L 〇 8 2 運算放大器。該運算放大器的負極輸入是來自一個參考電 壓源9 7。在本範例型之具體實施例裏，該參考電壓源是 由一個1 0仟歐姆電位器9 8構成的，該1 〇仟歐姆電位 器9 8是以串聯的方式連接在兩個1 0仟歐姆電阻器1 0 〇、1 0 2之間，這兩個1 0仟歐姆電阻器1 0 0、1 〇 2則是分別連接到地線和供給電壓源。一個〇 .4 7微法拉 電容器1 0 4被用來穩定該參考電壓的輸出。 如同熟悉本技術領域之人士將可明白，運算放大器9 6的功能有如一個用於輸入信號和參考電壓的比較器。一 般而言，電壓參考是被調整到使得它的數値稍低於來自第 二充電板6 6的最大輸入信號電壓。結果，當來自該充電 板的輸入信號電壓小於參考電壓的時候，該運算放大器的 輸出是低的，而當來自充電板的輸入信號電壓大於參考電 壓的時候，運算放大器的輸出是高的。在輸入信號是一個 週期信號的場合，像是由第一電氣系統3 8所產生的方形 波’運算放大器9 6的輸出將是一個類似的週期信號。然 29 ^--------訂---------線 {請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 本纸張尺度適用中画國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210x 297公爱） 458862 Α7 Β7 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費^乍^沪& 五、發明說明（V°|) 而，當使用者接觸到鋸片的時候’該最大輸入信號電壓會 減少到低於參考電壓’而運算放大器的輸出不再升高。 運算放大器9 6的輸出是聯接到一個充電電路1 〇 6 。該充電電路1 〇 6包括有一個連接於運算放大器9 6之 輸出端和地線之間的2 4 0微微法拉電容器1 〇 8。〜個 1 0 0仟歐姆放電電阻器1 1 2是竑聯於電容器1 〇 8的 。當運算放大器9 6的輸出是高的時候，電容器1 〇 8被 充電。相反地，當運算放大器9 6的輸出是低的時候，來 自電容器1 0 8的電荷通過放電電阻器1 1 2以大約2 4 微秒的時間常數被釋放。因而，除非電容器1 〇 8被來自 運算放大器的脈衝反覆地充電，在電容器1 0 8上面自勺胃 壓將在大約2 5至5 0微秒的時間裏釋放到少於供，給丨原胃 壓數値一半之大小。一個二極體1 1 0防止電容器放電至fj 運算放大器9 6裏面。二極體1 1 0可以是本技術領__ 早已爲人熟知之許多適當的二極體其中任一種，像是i N 9 1 4二極體。將可體會到：對於電容器1 〇 8所需要的 放電時間可以藉由選擇一個不同數値電容器或不同數値電 阻器1 1 2的方式來予以調整。 如同以上的說明，如果被偵測到的信號被收到而實質 上未自其在運算放大器9 6的參考電壓値衰減，充電電路 1 0 6將被反覆地充電，並且跨越電容器1 〇 8的電壓將 保持在高電位狀態。來自電容器1 〇 8的電壓被施加到運 算放大器1 1 4的負極輸入端。運算放大器1 1 4可以是 任何在此技術領域中已爲人熟知的許多適當之違算放大器 30 本紙張尺度適用令國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210 X 297公釐） ~'锖先間讀背面之注意事項再填寫本買} -<°_ --線· 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 B7 五、發明說明) 其中任一種，像是T L 0 8 2運算放大器。運算放大器1 1 4的正極輸入端是被連接到一個參考電壓，該參考電壓 是大約等於供給源電壓的一半大小。在圖3所示的範例型 具體實施例裏，該參考電壓是由參考電壓源9 7提供的。 如果’充電電路1 〇 6被重行充電，運算放大器1 1 4的輸出將是低的。然而，若是運算放大器9 6的輸出在 2 5至5 0微秒的一段時間內不升高，跨越電容器1 〇 8 的電壓將會衰減到小於參考電壓，而運算放大器1 1 4將 輸出一個高的信號，指示在使用者的身體和鋸片之間有接 觸發生。如同將在以下更詳細地說明，來自運算放大器1 1 4的輸出信號被連接來啓動刹車系統3 4，並停止該鋸 片。在接觸和剎車之間的時間長短能夠藉由選擇電容器1 0 8和電阻器1 1 2的時間常數的方式予以調整。 應注意到：視大小、架構和鋸片上的鋸齒數目和與操 作者接觸的部位而定.，操作者和鋸片之間的電氣接觸可能 是間歇性的。因此，該系統偵測接觸的時間需要少於或於 單一鋸齒接觸使用者手指或其它身體部位的時間。譬如， 假設一個1 0英吋的鋸片以每分鐘3 6 0 0轉的速度旋轉 ，且接觸距離大約爲四分之一英吋（大約爲一個手指的寬 度），在鋸片表面上的一點，像是鋸齒的齒尖，將會與使 用者接觸的時間大約是1 0 0微秒。在這段接觸期間之後 ，一般將有一個非接觸期間，直到下一個鋸齒到達手指爲 止。接觸和非接觸期間的長度將視各種因素而定，像是鋸 片上的鋸齒數目和鋸片的旋轉速度等。 一--------訂'--------線 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210 X 297公釐> 4 5 8 B 6，- A7 B7 經濟邹智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 五、發明說明（/ ) 讓系統能夠偵測與第一個鋸齒的接觸雖然不是必須的 ，但它是較佳的方式，因爲到第二鋸齒的時間間隔對於有 相對較少鋸齒的鋸片可能是相當長的。 更進一步地說’偵測上的任何延擱都會增加操作者所 承受的切割深度β因此，在這個範例型之實施例裏，充電 電路是被設計成能夠在大約2 5至5 0微秒的時間內衰減 ，以確保第二竃氣系統8 8能夠對使用者和鋸片之間即使 是瞬間的接觸也能產生反應。尤其’該振邊器在架構上被 設計成能夠產生一個脈衝大約每5微秒一次的2 0 0 k h z信號。結果，每一次接觸期間會發生輸入信號的許多脈 衝，藉此，增加接觸偵測的可靠性。另一取代的方式是’ 該振盪器和充電電路可以被設計成能夠使偵測系統更快速 地反應，或更慢地反應。一般而言’是想要使接觸偵測的 可靠度達到最大的程度，然而’要讓偵測錯誤發生的可能 性降低到最小的程度。 熟悉本技術領域之人士將可明白·‘鋸片6 4應該被從 接地被隔離開，以便容許輸入信號能夠在電容性上從充電 板6 2被聯接到第二充電板6 6。在圖4所示的這個範例 型之具體實施例裏，鋸片6 4是被電氣上隔離開安裝該鋸 片的心軸7 0，因而將鋸片與接地和機器的其它結構部份 隔離開來。有許多適當的設計可提供鋸片和心軸之間的電 氣隔離，這些設計可以視機器1 0的特殊架構而改變。譬 如，假如對於~個5/8英吋直徑之心軸7 0，鋸片6 4 可以設置有一個1英吋直徑的孔洞，在這個1英吋直徑的 32 ------------- ----- - - 訂--------I 線 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210x 297公釐） Δ7 458882 ------__ B7____ 五、發明說明（>0 ) 孔洞’裝設有一個3/1 6英吋厚的圓筒形塑膠襯套7 2 ’如同圖4所示。絕緣墊圈7,4，7 6被安排設置在鋸片 的任—側，以便將該鋸片與心軸凸緣7 8和心軸墊圈8 0 相隔離。這些絕緣墊圈應該是足夠厚，使得在該鋸片和接 地心軸凸緣和墊圏之間只能產生可忽略大小的電容量。這 個厚度一般大約是1/8英吋，雖然，視其它的因素而定 ’ 1/3 2英吋或更小也可能是適合的。另外，由非導電 材料來製造全部或部份的心軸元件像是陶瓷等以減少或消 除電氣隔離開心軸的需要也是可能的。 一個心軸螺帽8 2將整個鋸片組合件固定在心軸7 0 上。由鎖緊該心軸螺帽8 2所產生的摩擦作用力可以讓扭 力轉矩從該心軸被傳送到鋸床的鋸片上。較佳的但不是必 須要有的是：假如受到剎車的作用使得機器突然地停止， 鋸片能夠在心軸上稍稍滑動，以減少必須被阻擋住的質量 ，並且減少傷害到鋸片、心軸、和/或鋸床的傳動系統裏 其它兀件的機會。更進而，可能想要從一種足夠柔軟而可 以在鋸片被突然地停住的時候發生變胗的材料中製造出這 些襯套。譬如，當刹車被作動的時候，視所使用的刹車系 統之種類而定，一實質徑向衝擊負荷可以被傳送到心軸上 。一個可變形的襯套能夠被用來吸收這些衝擊的一部份， 並且減少對心軸造成損害的機會。另外，適當的剎車位置 配合可變形的襯套可以在觸發刹車作用的時候被用來使得 館片從使用者處移開’如同以下所將作更進—步的詳細討 論一般。 33 用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（21〇 x 297 ---- (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 訂· -線· 經濟部智慧財產局員χ"ΐ I ρΐ 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合阼k申段 ；' 4- 5 08 6 2 A7 ----—--包_____ 五、發明說明I) 在一個替代方案的具體實施例裏，心軸和/或它的支 撐框架的-部份是與接地呈電氣上的隔離，而不是將館片 與該心軸隔離開來。這_實施例的好處之—帛：假如，銷 片係電=上與心軸連接’然後，該心軸本身能夠被用來將 該輸入信號從充電板6 2進行電容藕合到第二充電板6 6 。雖然，追個替代性具體實施例的特定執行方法將是隨著 切削工具的架構而改變，一個範例型的執行方法是被圖示 於圖5裏。如同圖5所示，鋸片6 4是直接安裝在心軸7 0上面。如圖4所示，鋸片是藉由心軸凸緣7 8、心軸墊 圈8 0和心軸螺帽8 2而被固定到心軸上。 心軸是藉由一對沿著心軸之縱長軸線分離配置的軸承 7 9的支撐而可作旋轉移動。然而，軸承7 9不直接接觸 到“心軸而疋’以電氣絕緣襯套8 4配置在心軸和軸承 之間。軸承7 9是安裝在一個心軸活動塊8 裏。該心軸 活動塊8 1可以讓鋸片被升起和下降，也能夠被傾斜以便 進行斜角度的切削。~個馬達（圖中未顯示出來）透過一 條捲繞在一個滑輪8 6上的皮帶8 3帶動心軸。該滑輪8 6係設置在心軸上與鋸片相反的一端。皮帶8 3 —般是非 導體材料製成的，因此不會將心軸對地線作電氣藕合（聯 接）。 絕緣襯套8 4可以由任何相對耐用且不導電之適當材 料製成，這些材料包括有：塑膠、陶瓷等等。絕緣襯套8 4可以被設計成安裝在一個具有固定直徑的心軸上，如圖 所示，或是，該心軸可以設有凹槽，以容納這些襯套，使 34 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210 X 297公釐） }. ..Μ .乂--------訂---------線--- (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 經濟部智慧財產居員工消費合泎、Fi•中Μ 45 88 B 2 A7 --—___B7_____ 五、發明說明（>X) 襯套的外部直徑與心軸的外徑齊平。更進一步地，可以理 解到：有許多其它的安排用來對該心軸作電氣上的隔離（ 絕緣）。此處列舉一些例子：可以將絕緣襯套84設置在 軸承7 9和心軸活動塊8 1之間，或是，至少這些軸承的 —些部份可以使用非導體材料製成。另一代替的方法是， 心軸組合件的較大部份可以是與鋸床的其餘部份隔離開來 〇 在任何情況之下，充電板6 2和充電板6 6是被沿著 心軸的側邊設置，但與心軸稍稍分離開。這些充電板一般 具有對應於心軸的形狀和排列，以確保足夠的電容藕合. 譬如，這些充電板可以設有槽溝的形狀，以便能夠配合心 軸的圓柱形狀，如同圖5所示。另一替代方式是，這些充 電板可以是環形的’以便能夠完全圍繞在心軸的軸向分隔 部份的四周。充電板一般是被支撐在心軸活動塊8 1上面 ，像是藉由延伸自框架的固定座8 5來支撐。這種安排保 證當鋸片的位置或角度受到調整的時候，這些充電板將與 心軸呈一前一後地移動。固定座經常地被設計成能將充電 板與框架之間作電氣的絕緣。由於充電板在使用時不會像 鋸片一般地偏折，因此這些充電板能夠被放置在非常接近 心軸的位置’因而可以使用較小的充電板。 雖然以上已經說明數個能夠將充電板作電容性藕合到 心軸的範例型設計，可由本說明中理解到：有許多適當的 安排可以達成上述之目的，而本發明不限於某個特定的設 計。例如，在兩軸承之間，或在軸承與皮帶之間沒有足夠 35 t— 、 I n n n n n (I n n I n n I · n n n n n K I』5J* ϋ I i *1 n n n 1 l n (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210 X 297公g ) 4 5 8 B 6 2 A7 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 _______B7 五、發明說明（A7)) 空間的場合’雨個充電板或其中之一個充電板可以被擺置 在滑輪的另一側（如圖5所示）。另外，也可以維持一個 直接而非電容性電氣連接到該鋸片，以偵測使用者在接觸 時的電容負荷。 現在將注意力轉移到剎車系統3 4，有許多可能的方 法用來在接觸檢測系統3 2發出使用者與鋸片發生接觸的 信號的時候停止鋸片6 4。在一個具體實施例裏，剎車系 統3 4包括有一個或多個掣爪，這些掣爪在架構上被設計 成能夠移動到與鋸片接觸並且將鋸片立即帶引至停止。這 些掣爪一般是被擺設在相對地緊密靠近館片的地方，以便 能夠減少將掣爪移動到與鋸片相接觸位置所需要的時間。 一個驅動機構可對接觸檢測系統3 2的輸出信號產生反應 ，而將掣爪移動到與錯片相接觸的位置。這些掣爪可以御 接鋸片的任何一個或多個部份’包括館齒、側邊等等。另 一個替代方式是：假如鋸片是牢固地附著到心軸，在要突 然地停止該心軸的時候，這些掣爪可以啣接心軸以阻止鋸 片的旋轉。一些心軸組合件包括有一個帶有插銷7 7的心 軸凸緣7 8 ’該插銷7 7以平行心軸軸桿7 0的方式延伸 啣接到鋸片裏的一個與中心孔分隔開的孔洞裏面，如圖4 中虛線所代表的。若設有插銷，則該插銷7 7可以是一個 剪切銷’以便容許鋸片能夠被瞬間停住而不須也停止該心 軸。 —個範例型之刹車系統3 4的具體實施例是顯示在圖 2之中。將可由本說明中明白：該刹車系統的各種元件之 36 '--------訂---------線---- I {請先閲讀贲面之泫意事項再填寫本頁) 本紙張尺度卿τ幽國家標年（CNS)A4規格d1〇K297公髮） 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 5 88 6 2 A7 ___B7五、發明說明（）十：） 設計可以隨著特定切削工具之架構而改變。如圖所示，一 個單獨的刹車掣爪1 4 0是可樞轉自如地跨站在一個帶肩 螺栓1 4 2上而被安裝到鋸床框架，該帶肩螺栓1 4 2是 被螺鎖入或是固定在鄰近鋸片的鋸床框架。該掣爪是安裝 來啣接鋸片周邊上的鋸齒。鄰近鋸片的掣爪端部可以設有 斜面或者設置有可確保掣爪在觸及鋸齒的時候能夠完全且 立即地啣接鋸齒的形狀。此外，掣爪的形狀可以被設計成 一旦接觸到鋸齒的時候，鋸片的動作會讓掣爪更進一步地 樞轉，並且驅使掣爪更緊密地推抵這些鋸齒。 在此一範例型之具體實施例裏，驅動機構包括有一個 彈簧1 3 0，該彈簧1 3 0被設計用來壓頂掣爪的自由端 ，使它推抵著鋸片。一般而言，彈簧的形狀架構要能夠在 一旦該刹車系統被作動的時候沿著鋸片的方向施加連續的 作用力到掣爪上面。這將確保該掣爪不會從接觸鋸片的位 置上跳回。將由本說明中可明白：本發明可以使用許多不 同的彈簧形狀架構，包括：壓縮彈簧、拉伸彈簧、扭轉彈 簧等等。在這個範例型之實施例裏，該彈簧是由一段1/ 8英吋鋼琴線製成的，且中心部份捲繞成一線圏1 3 2， 並跨站在一螺栓（圖中未顯示出來）上面形成鋸床框架的 一部份。然而，其它尺寸大小和類別的線材也可能適用。 在無線遙控飛機上所使用的線控前起落架就是另一個適當 的彈簧例子。無論任何情形之下，該彈簧被抵靠在掣爪上 ，以迫使掣爪壓頂著鋸片。一般而言，彈簧將施加1至5 0 0英磅的作用力到掣爪上，而1 5至1 0 0英磅的作用 37 ,Λ--------訂---------線 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210 X 297公釐） 4 5 88 62 經濟部智慧財產局員11-肖乍t pit A7 B7 i、發明說明（巧y) 力則是更爲適合的。較大的作用力提供較快的啓動作用， 但也使得釋放掣爪的系統將變得更爲複雜。 在圖示的具體實施例裏，彈簧的一端被偏壓抵頂著另 ~個安裝在鋸床框架上的螺栓1 3 4。彈簧1 3 0上與螺 栓1 3 4相反的一端則接觸著刹車掣爪1 4 0的自由端。 線圏1 3 2和螺栓1 3 4是被設置在一個適當的位置上能 夠使該彈簧彎曲地抵靠著掣爪--即使該掣爪是在與鋸片 接觸的狀態之中。一個限制構件1 2 2將彈簧在略微更進 一步彎曲的狀態之下固定住，以便在正常使用時能夠讓掣 爪稍微樞轉離開該鋸片。當接觸檢測系統3 2發出一個輸 出信號指示在使用者和鋸片之間發生接觸的時候，該限制 構件釋放開彈簧，該彈簧驅動掣爪使它與鋸片嚙合。假如 ，剎車系統3 4被啓動且彈簧被釋開，系統可以藉由將彈 簧拉離開該掣爪並重行連接和/或更換限制構件的方式使 系統被重置還原。 限制構件1 2 2能夠被設計成許多不同的架構形態。 一般而言，限制構件是被設計成在接收到一個來自偵測系 統的輸出信號的時候能夠真正地瞬間釋開彈簧。在此範例 型之具體實施例裏，限制構件1 2 2形式上是一個可熔斷 構件或可熔斷線材。可熔斷構件1 2 2是被連接到一個點 火系統115(將在以下詳細說明），該點火系統115 熔融掉線材以回應來自偵測電路的一個輸出信號。一旦該 線材熔斷，彈簧被釋放開來，因而驅動掣爪卡入到鋸片裏 面。要重置此一範例型之刹車系統，需安裝一個新的可熔 38 {請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) kSJ· _ .線- 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210 χ 297公釐） 4 5 88 6 2 A7 _ B7 I五、發明說明（y4) 斷構件，以保持該彈簧在離開館片的狀態。同時，也可更 換掣爪。 可熔斷構件1 2 2可以是此一技術領域中已爲人熟知 的許多材料之中的任何—種。例如，一個適當的可熔斷構 件是一條0‘ 010英吋直徑的鎳鉻合金線材或一條鋼絞 線。一般而言，這種可熔斷構件應該具備有一個高的拉伸 強度，以致於相較於熔斷該構件所需要的熱這種強度可達 到最大的程度。在此一範例型之具體實施例裏，該線材的 兩端分別形成一個環圏。整體的總長度大體上是少於大約 1英吋，而在兩個環圏之間有一個大約1/1 6至1/2 英吋的熔斷區。短的熔斷區是有利於在啓動剎車的時候可 將電力集中在小範圍的區域裏。以一較大而帶有減縮的腰 部區段之線材來製成該可熔斷構件可能是較爲受歡迎的’ 這可達到在該腰部區段有較高的電流密度以便更爲集中熱 能。 經濟部智慧財產"^ 可熔斷構件的一個端部環圈是被連接到剎車偏壓彈簧 1 3 0上與螺栓1 3 4相反的一端。環圏的另一端是被安 裝在一個電氣絕緣的接觸線柱1 3 6 °當電流被施加到該 接觭線柱1 3 6的時候，它流過可熔斷構件到達彈簧1 3 〇。彈簧和螺栓的導電性將該熔絲在電氣上連接到已接地 的鋸床框架上。因而’當電流被送到接觸線柱1 3 6的時 候，它流過該可熔斷構件而到達接地之鋸床框架。當供給 足夠的電流的時候，該可熔斷構件將會熔融並且釋放開彈 簧，以帶動掣爪壓抵向鋸片。從本說明中可明白：根據本 39 表紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210 X 297公釐） 458862 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合阼狂屮契 A7 ___ B7_____ 五 '發明說明) 發明，對於該可熔斷構件的安排可以有許多不同的方法。 作爲一個說明例子，線材的一個環圈能夠被附著到接觸線 柱1 3 6上，而相反端的另一個環圏則被固定在一個接地 線柱C圖中未顯示出來）。假如，該線衬的中點被放置超 過鄰近掣爪的彈簧端部，當該線材被熔融的時候，彈簧即 被釋放開。在這種設計之中，熔融該可熔斷構件的電流只 從接觸線柱通過可熔斷構件並進入到接地線柱。 將可從本說明中瞭解到：可熔斷構件之尺寸大小至少 部份地將視限制該彈簧所需要的作用力而定。一般而言， 較大的彈簧作用力是較受歡迎的，以便增加速度和掣爪接 觸鋸片的作用力。在需要較多壓力的場合，可能需要較大 直徑的可'熔斷構件，藉此需要較大的電流量以熔融掉該可 熔斷構件°在圖2所示的範例型之具體實施例裏，該彈簧 —般施加1 5至1 5英磅的作用力推抵該可熔斷構件，並且 當被釋放開的時候，隨之推頂該刹車掣爪。應瞭解到：一 個I寬廣範圍1的作用力和機構可被用來移動該掣爪，這個作 用力的範圍可以高達數百英磅或更大。在一些環境之下， 也可能較受歡迎的是：使用一個兩階段釋放系統，像是在 許多捕捉機中使用的—樣，以減少該可熔斷構件所需要施 加的作用力。以下請參照圖2 8。這可以容許使用~個較 小直彳莖之可培斷線材，這種較小直徑之線材能夠更快速地 且能夠以較小的電流突變予以熔斷。 如同以上的說明，可熔斷構件1 2 2是由一個點火系 統1 1 5 (如圖3所示）予以熔斷的，該點火系統1 1 5 __ 40 ----------^---I---- (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 本纸張尺度適用中國國家標準7^^· 規格（210 X 297公釐） 45 8862 B7 五、發明說明（3(f) 產生—個突然的電流脈衝到該可熔斷構件1 2 2以回應接 觸檢測系統3 2的輸出信號。對於以上所述之範例型之可 溶斷構件’需要大約2 〇至1 0 〇安培電流以確保能夠完 全且快速地熔斷。如同熟悉本技術領域之人士當可明白： 有許多電路可適合使闱來提供這種電流突波。圖3所示的 範例型之點火系統115具體實施例包括有〜個或更多個 電荷儲存裝置，這些電荷儲存裝置透過可熔斷構件1 2 2 予以放電，以回應第二電氣系統8 8的輸出信號。電荷儲 存裝置的使用免除了使用大電流供給源來熔斷該可熔斷構 件1 2 2的需要。然而，從本說明將可瞭解：一個電流供 給源可以被用來取代電荷儲存裝置。另—方式是，其它裝 置也可以用來供給所需要的電流，這些裝置包括連接於電 源2 2的矽可控整流器或三端雙向可控矽器件。 範例型具體實施例的點火系統包括有一對相對高電流 量的電晶體1 1 8 ,該電晶體1 1 8被連接來將儲存在儲 存裝置內的電流傳送到可熔斷構件1 2 2。電晶體i丄8 接收到第二電氣電路8 8之輸出信號時即開啓。如圖3所 不，運舁放大器1 1 4的輸出端是被一個1 〇仟歐姆電阻 器1 1 6連接到接地之地線以及被連接到電晶體丄丄8的 閘極。任何適當的電晶體都可以被採用，像是在此—技術 領域中已爲人熟知的IRFZ40MOSFET電晶體。 這些電晶體是並聯地連接於電荷儲存裝置1 2 0和可熔斷 構件1 2 2之間。在這個範例型之具體實施例裏，電荷儲 存裝置1 2 0形式上是一個7 5，0 0 0微法拉電容器組 41 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210 X 297公爱） (請先閲讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) . 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合泎江申設 45 8b A7 B7 經濟部智慧財產局員1-1消費乍£·ρϊ 五、發明說明（q) 。一個連接到2 4伏特供給源的1 〇 〇歐姆電阻器1 2 4 被用來建立和維持該電容器組上的電荷。當運算放大器1 1 4的輸出升高的時候，電晶體1 1 8可讓被儲存在電容 器組裏的電荷通過該可熔斷構件1 2 2 β被儲存在電容器 組裏的電荷被突然釋放出來後會加熱該可焙斷構件1 2 2 ，使它在大約1至5毫秒內到達熔點。另一個方式是，一 個或多個電晶體可以由其它開關裝置來取代，像是矽可控 整流器（S C R)。使用儲存電荷來熔化該可熔斷構件1 2 2的優點之一是：點火系統不依賴電源線的電氣容量或 電源線電壓的相位。 如同以上的說明’在使用者身體和鋸片6 4之鋸齒之 間的接觸可能是時斷時續的，這會視鋸齒的大小和排列而 定。雖然，第二電氣系統8 8 —般在架構上是被設計成能 夠偵測到短促達到2 5至5 0微秒的接觸時間，一旦鋸片 的第一個鋸齒通過使用者的身體的時候，由第二電氣電路 所接收到的信號可能回到正常狀態直到下一個鋸齒接觸到 使用者的身體爲止。結果，雖然，在運算放大器1丨4的 輸出信號將因第一次接觸而升高，但一旦第一次接觸結束 ，這輸出信號可能會回到低電位狀態。假如，該輸出信號 不保持在高電位狀態持續足夠長的時間以完全釋放電荷儲 存裝置裏的電荷，可熔斷構件1 2 2可能不會熔化。因而 ’第二電氣系統8 8可以在運算放大器1 1 4的輸出端上 設有一個類似充電電路1 0 6的充電電路1 1 7。一旦運 算放大器1 1 4產生一個高電位之輸出信號的時候，充電 42 --------I------ (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210 X 297公釐） A7 4 5 8 B 6 2 ______B7____ 五、發明說明（ί^〇) 電路117的作用是用來保證該輸出信號會維持在高電位 一個足夠長的時間，以充分地放電該電荷儲存裝置，而熔 化該可熔斷構件1 2 2。在此一範例型之具體實施例裏， 充電電路117包括有一個連接於運算放大器114輸出 端和接地地線之間的〇 . 4 7微法拉電容器1 1 9。當運 算放大器1 1 4的輸出升高的時候，0 . 4 7微法拉電容 器1 1 9即充電達到該輸出信號之電位。假如，運算放大 器1 1 4的輸出回到低電位，跨越電容器1 1 9之電壓會 通過10仟歐姆電阻器116而以一大約爲4. 7毫秒的 時間常數放電。一個譬如是1 Ν 9 1 4之二極體可防止電 容器1 1 9通過運算放大器1 1 4放電。 上述之系統能夠在大約5 0微秒以內偵測出接觸的發 生’並且在大約一至三毫秒以內釋放刹車。然後，該剎車 在大約一至三毫秒內接觸到鋸片。鋸片正常情形之下將在 不超過2至1 0毫秒的剎車嚙合之後停止下來。結果，假 如意外地碰觸到切削工具的時候，對於操作者的傷害能夠 被減少到最低的程度。經過適當選擇元件，本發明能夠在 1毫秒或更少的時間內停止鋸片的運轉。另—個方式是， 視各種參數，譬如是彈簧作用力、掣爪尺寸大小和形狀、 鋸片型式、鋸片速度等等，在架構上將該刹車系統設計成 在5毫秒、1 0毫秒、1 5毫秒、2 0毫秒、或5 〇毫秒 時間內令鋸片停止。 雖然，第一電氣系統3 8、第二電氣系統8 8、和點 火系統115的範例型具體實施例已經籍由具有特定數値 43 (請先閱請背面之注意事項再填寫本買) f . 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合咋^巾纪 本紙張尺度適用t國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210 297公;II ) 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合怍.达卬级 H S 88 6 2 Α7 一 -----------B7___ 五、發明說明（斗1) 的特定元件並且以特定的架構排列來予以說明如上’可由 本發明之說明中理解到：這些系統可以依照某一特定用途 的實際需要或偏好以種種不同的形狀架構、元件、和數値 來建造完成。上述之形狀架構、元件、和數値只是用作爲 說明一特定的且已被證明爲有效的具體實施例之目的，它 們應被視爲本發明的說明而不是本發明的限制。 圖6說明第一電氣系統3 8、第二電氣系統8 8、和 點火系統1 1 5的另一個替代性之具體實施例，這些系統 可形成本發明之安全止動機構3 0的一部份。該替代性之 第一電氣系統3 8在架構上被設計成能夠使用一個單獨的 比較器4 0 0，像是LM 3 9 3比較器，產生一個方形波 。一個1百萬歐姆電阻器4 0 2被連接於比較器4 0 ◦的 高電位輸入端和地線之間。另一個1百萬歐姆電阻器4 0 4是被連接於比較器4 0 0的高電位輸入端和一個低電壓 供給源V之間。一個1百萬歐姆電阻器4 0 6被連接於比 較器的高電位輸入端和比較器的輸出端之間。一個1 0 0 微微法拉電容器4 0 8是被連接於比較器的低電位輸入端 和接地地線之間。一個2 7仟歐姆電阻器4 1 0被連接於 比較器的低電位輸入端和比較器的輸出端之間。一個3. 3仟歐姆電阻器412被連接於低電壓供給源V和比較器 的輸出端之間。圖6所示的替代性之振盪器電路產生一個 具有大約是5 0 Q k h z頻率之方形波。一個1仟歐姆電 阻器4.1 4被連接於比較器的輸出端和帶有屏蔽作用之電 纜線6 0之間，以減少瞬間振盪。可由本說明中明白：這 44 本纸張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210 χ297公釐） -'------- 訂---------線--r : (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作；Μ 五、發明說明 個替代性之第一電氣系統3 8的一個或多個元件之數値可 以被改變以產生具有不同的頻率、不同的波形等等之信號 如同在上述之範例型的具體實施例之中，由替代性之 第一電氣系統3 8產生的信號被送往通過帶有屏蔽作用之 電纜線6 0而到達充電板6 2。該信號經由鋸片6 4被電 容藕合於第二充電板6 6。替代性之第二電氣系統8 8經 由帶有屏蔽作用之電纜線9 0接收到來自第二充電板6 6 的信號’並且將該信號與一個參考電壓相比較。假如，該 信號持續一段大約2 5微秒的時間落於該參考電壓之下， 便產生一個輸出信號，指示在鋸片和使用者的身體之間有 接觸發生。 替代性之第二電氣系統8 8包括有一個電壓分壓器9 1，該電壓分壓器9 1是由一個2 2仟歐姆電阻器4 1 6 和一個2 2仟歐姆電阻器4 1 8組成的。該電壓分壓器9 1對經由電纜線9 0所接收到的信號給予偏壓，使達到低 電壓供給源V的一半。由於低頻信號被衰減，相對於電阻 器9 2和9 4，電阻器4 1 6和4 1 8的低電阻被用來減 少6 0 h z的雜訊。受到偏壓的信號被送往一個譬如是l Μ 3 9 3比較器的第二比較器4 2 0的低電位輸入端。第 二比較器4 2 0的正極端被連接到參考電壓源4 2 2。在 圖示的具體實施例裏，該參考電壓源是由一個1 〇仟歐姆 電位器.4 2 4串聯在兩個1 0 0仟歐姆電阻器4 2 6、4 2 8之間，該兩個電阻器4 2 6、4 2 8則分別被連接到 45 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（2J10 X 297公釐〉 I I I n n n I» n n n n I -Λ n n n I I» I 一5J* It n i I I It n 1 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) A7 B7 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作任"5代; Line 丨 IV Member of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs and Consumer Consumption; iL AM This paper size applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) Λ7 458862 ______B7_____ V. Description of the invention (/ #) (please first Read the notes on the back and fill in this page) In addition to activating the brake system 3 4, the contact detection system 3 2 also preferably interrupts the power to the motor assembly 12 or at least, interrupts the transmission of the cutting tool in the motor assembly The power of the transmission part. For example, when the machine 10 is provided with an electromagnetic contactor as described in the above example, the contact detection system 32 may be designed to interrupt the circuit holding the electromagnetic contactor so that the power connected to the motor is interrupted. It should be understood from this article: This step is optional, because interrupting the power to the motor of the machine is not necessary or sufficient to prevent serious injury to the user when the user touches the cutting tool method. Therefore, the main function of this step is to reduce the damage to the motor assembly or the drive system when the braking system 34 is stopping the rotary motion or other movement of the cutting tool. -Consumption of employees in the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Online Economics will be understood from this description: The contact detection system 3 2 can use any one or more different methods to detect the contact or proximity between the cutting tool and the user's body happened. In view of the relatively high response speed of electronic signals and circuits, appropriate detection methods include the use of electrical circuits to detect the electronic connection between the user and the cutting tool. Those familiar with this technical field should already be familiar with: the human body's capacitance is about 300 picofarads. As a result, when the user comes into contact with the cutting tool 14, the capacitance of the user's body is electrically connected to the inherent capacitance of the cutting tool, thereby generating an effective capacitance larger than the inherent capacitance of the individual cutting tool. Therefore, the contact detection system 32 can be electrically connected to the cutting tool to measure its capacitance, so that any substantial change in the measured capacitance will represent contact between the user and the cutting tool. The safety of the above-mentioned various traditional technologies 21 This paper size is applicable to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 public love) 45 8862 A7 B7 Printed by the Ministry of Economic Affairs Intellectual Property Consumers Cooperatives V. Invention Description (丨 1) Full The system also provides a variety of methods to detect these contact or proximity conditions that can be used to trigger the brake system. Figures 2 and 3 schematically illustrate a specific example of a capacitive touch sensing reconnaissance system 32. The contact detection system 32 includes a first electrical system, which is architecturally designed to generate an input signal and is connected to the capacitor via a cutting tool to a second electrical system which can detect the input signal on the architecture. In this design, any change in the cutting tool capacitance will change the input signal to the second electrical system. Thus, contact between the user's body and the cutting tool causes the second electrical system to begin detecting changes in the input signal. In this example, the contact detection system 32 includes a [first electrical system 38, which is architecturally designed to generate an input signal. The first electrical system 38 is connected to a charging plate 6 2 which is mounted close to but separate from a cutting tool 14. In FIG. 2, the cutting tool 14 is shown as a saw blade 6 4 . The charging plate 62 is coupled to the saw blade on the capacitor, and its size and position are parallel to the saw blade but separated from the saw blade. The stomach two charging plate 66 is also mounted near the saw blade in order to establish a second capacitive connection. The number, size and position of the charging pads can be arbitrarily changed, and it should be included in the scope of the present invention. The effect of the device shown in Figure 2 is to form two capacitors connected in series through the saw blade, creating a capacitive shunt at the junction of the two capacitors. The input signal is thus transmitted from the charging plate 62 through the saw blade to the second charging plate 66. As shown in the figure, this exemplary contact detection system 3 2 22 This paper size is applicable to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210x297 public love) I i III 11 II 1 'Agriculture · ---- I — —Order · 1 In I --- (Please read the precautions on the back before filling out this page) ^ 58862 A7 ---__ B7_______ V. Description of Invention (yo) also includes a second electrical system 8 8 and the second electrical system 8 8 It is connected to the second charging board 66 and is architecturally designed to detect a change in an input signal received by the second charging board 66. When the user touches the saw blade, the capacitance of the user's body creates a capacitive load on the saw blade. As a result, the size of the capacitive shunt between the charging plate and the saw blade is increased, thereby reducing the amount of charge reaching the second charging plate 66. Therefore, when the user touches the saw blade, the size of the input signal that reaches the second charging board 66 through the saw blade is reduced. As will be discussed in more detail, the second electrical system 88 is architecturally designed to be able to respond to such input signal changes while giving the brake system 34 4 output signals. In some cases, there may be a significant impedance between the user's dry skin and the saw blade. Such impedance may reduce the capacitive coupling between the user and the saw blade. However, when the sawtooth on the saw blade penetrates the outer layer of the user's skin, the inherent humidity of the fibers inside the skin will reduce the impedance of the skin and saw blade contact, thus establishing a reliable electrical connection between them. Furthermore, as will be explained below, the sensitivity of the second electrical system 88 can be adjusted as desired so that even a slight change in the input signal can be detected. Although an exemplary system and method for detecting contact between a user and a saw blade is described here, there are many other systems and methods that can be used, all of which are within the scope of the present invention. For example, the detection system can detect the impedance of the human body when a contact occurs between the user and the saw blade to detect that such contact has occurred. As another example, near the saw 23 paper size, the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) is applied (please read the precautions on the back before filling this page), staff of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs Printed by the Consumer Cooperative A7 458862 B7__ 5. Description of the Invention (/ |) (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) Radio signals can be placed near the film, so that the user ’s body functions as an antenna In order to change the signal received through the saw blade when the user comes into contact with the saw blade. Similarly, by standing on a signal transmission felt or wearing a transmitter, a signal can be applied to the user's body, and a detection system can monitor the signal generated by the contact or proximity of the cutting tool. receive. As another example, a proximity detector may be used as described above. Because the brake system 34 can stop the saw blade in a few milliseconds, this proximity detector can be set to trigger the safety system only when the user is very close to the saw blade. This will allow the user to place the workpiece close to the saw blade without triggering the brake system. As another example, the wire mesh glove detection system used in meat cutting equipment can also be used to achieve the same purpose. Therefore, it will be understood that although an example of an exemplary capacitive contact detection system is described here, any other suitable method capable of detecting the user's contact with or approaching the saw blade can be used. The Intellectual Property Bureau employee consumer cooperative prints Figure 3 to illustrate the appropriate architecture of a first electrical system 38 and a second electrical system 88. However, those familiar with the field of electrical technology will understand that the exemplary architecture of the contact detection system 32 shown in Figure 3 is just one of many architectures that can be used. Thus, it will be understood that any suitable embodiment or architecture may be used within the scope of the invention. As shown in FIG. 3, the first electrical system 38 includes an oscillator circuit capable of generating a waveform input signal having a frequency of approximately 200 kHz and a voltage amplitude of 12 volts, such as a square wave signal. 24 This paper size applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 = < 297 Public Love) Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs ^ 4 5 8862 Α7 Β7 V. Description of Invention (> :). Alternatively, the first electrical system 38 may be architecturally designed to generate a signal having a different frequency and / or different amplitude and / or different waveform. The oscillator is formed by a pair of inverters 40 and 42, which is a bistable oscillator of CD 4 0 4 0 in architecture. The output of the inverter 40 is connected to a 100 picofarad (P f) capacitor 4 4, which is connected to the inverter 4 2 via a 100 ohm resistor 4 6 Input. A 10 ohm resistor 48 connects the output of the inverter 42 to the junction between the capacitor 44 and the 10 ohm resistor 48. The output terminal of the inverter 42 is connected to the input terminal of the inverter 40. A 10 仟 ohm resistor 50 connects the output of inverter 40 to the input of inverter 52. Inverter 52 is used as an output buffer to drive the input waveform. The signal enters the saw blade. 2 仟 ohm series resistor 5 4 is to reduce the high-frequency components of the signal to reduce the instantaneous oscillation in the input signal ^ It will be understood that the specific form of the oscillator signal can be changed and there are many suitable The waveform and frequency can be used. You can choose a waveform that can maximize the signal / noise ratio. For example, you can choose a frequency at which the human body has the lowest impedance, or the human body has the most local capacitance relative to the workpiece to be cut. In addition, there are many different oscillator circuits that have been publicly disclosed in the art, and these oscillator circuits are also very suitable for generating input signals. The input signal generated by the oscillator is sent to the charging board 62 through a shielded electric cable 60. Cable with shielding effect 6 0 25 This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 Xϋmm) ^ -------- Order --------- Wire—L (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) Member of Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs, Consumer Cooperation Du printed 4 5 88 〇Α7 ------_ Β7__ V. Description of Invention (yj) is used to convert the input signal and Any electrical noise present in the operating environment is isolated 'to ensure that a "clean" input signal is sent to the charging pad 62. Other methods to prevent noise in the input signal can also be used. A further alternative is that the second electrical system 88 may include a filter to remove any noise in the input signal or other electrical interference signals that would be detected by the charging board 66. In general, the spacing between the charging plate and the saw blade is not very important. However, ‘might want to isolate these charging plates from the saw blade a short distance selected to reduce the deflection effect of the saw blade on the capacitance between the saw blade and the charging plate. For example, if the saw blade is moved by one third of one of the charging plates under the influence of the load generated during cutting, the capacitance of the charging plate will increase. Because the capacitance is proportional to the area of the charging board divided by the separation distance, a relatively large separation distance will reduce the effect of a known blade displacement. Similarly, it is better to place the charging board relatively near the center of the saw blade, because the saw blade has the smallest displacement near the mandrel where it is installed. Distances in the range of about 1/32 inches to about 1/2 inches have proven to be most effective, although numbers outside this range can be used under appropriate conditions. In another alternative embodiment, at least one of the charging boards may include one or more insulation dividers 68 mounted on the side of the charger near the charger, as shown in FIG. 2. The insulating divider 68 acts as an actual barrier to prevent the saw blade from being deflected too close to the charging plate. This is when the distance between the charging plate and the saw blade is 26. This paper size is in accordance with the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 x 297 mm · centimeter) '· ^ --------- Order ---- ----- Line If, one (please read the notes on the back before filling out this page) Printed by the Consumer Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs A7 B7 5. The invention description (ytj) is particularly useful when it is relatively small of. The separator 68 can be made of any electrically insulating material, including ceramic, glass, and so on. In the exemplary embodiment shown in FIG. 2, the insulating spacers 68 cover only a small area between the charging plate and the saw blade. As a result, these insulating spacers 68 are provided between the saw blade and the charging plate. The capacitance has only a relatively small effect. Alternatively, the divider can cover a substantial portion of the space, or even the entire space between the charging pad and the saw blade. In the latter case, the divider functions at least partially as an insulator between the charging pad and the conductor surface of the saw blade. Therefore, the capacitance between the saw blade and the charging board will depend on the dielectric constant of the separator. In addition to one or more separators 6 8 installed between the charging plate and the saw blade, a separator (not shown in the figure) can be installed on the side of the saw blade opposite to the charging plate. This prevents the saw blade from deflecting too far off the charging plates. The divider can be designed to slide ' over the surface of the saw blade so that these charging plates will move with any deflection of the saw blade. The advantage of this arrangement is that a close interval can be established and maintained, thereby reducing the size of the charging pad. It will be understood that the sizes of the charging plates 62 and 66 can also be changed. Generally, the area of the charging board is between 1 and 10 square inches. However, many other sizes can be used, including sizes outside this range. An example of a suitable charging board material is a copper-plated printed circuit board, which is relatively hard and thin. Other examples include: any more conductive conductor material such as gold, aluminum, brass, steel, etc. In the ground with a large grounded metal structure near the saw blade 27 --------- Order ---------- Wire (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) This paper Standards are applicable to 111 national standards (CNS) A4 specifications (210 X 297 mm) 45 88 6 2 Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (* ^), a larger driver can be used The charging plate 62 partially shields the saw blade to prevent a capacitive connection with the ground structure. Although, the larger charging board will also have an increased capacitive connection to the ground structure, which will not disturb the operation of the system, because the first electrical system 38 can drive far more electricity than is generated in these environments. capacity. As described above, the input signal is transmitted from the charging board 62 to the second charging board 66 via the saw blade 64. As shown in Fig. 3, the signal received on the second charging board 66 is then sent to the second electrical system 88 via a shielded cable 90. The second electrical system 8 8 is architecturally designed to detect changes in the signal due to contact between the user's body and the saw blade. It will be understood from this description that the second electrical system 88 can be implemented in many different designs and architectures. In the specific embodiment shown in FIG. 3, the 'second electrical system 88 compares the amplitude of the input signal received by the second charging board 66 with an established reference voltage. If the input signal received at the second charging board 66 is lower than the reference voltage for a period of time, the second electrical system 88 will generate an output signal to the braking system 34. The brake system 34 is architecturally designed to be able to receive this output signal and immediately start to work, stopping the operation of the saw blade. The specific components of the second electrical system 88 may vary with many different factors', including factors such as use, desired sensitivity, availability of components, available power categories, and the like. In this exemplary embodiment, a shielded cable 9 is connected between the first charging plate 66 and a voltage divider g. Voltage Divider 9 28 This paper size is applicable to Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification ⑵Ο X 297 ^ 57 ^ -------- Order --------- Line --- Γ (Please first Read the notes on the back and fill in this page again) Consumption of employees of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs; ± i .: psa 45 88 β 2 Α7 ______ Β7 ___ Five 'invention description (yL) 1 is composed of two 1 megaohm resistors 9 2 '9 4 is a ° voltage divider 9 1 formed in series between a voltage supply source (normally about 12 volts in size) and ground. The function of the voltage divider 9 1 is to bias the output signal from the second charging board 66. Reached half the size of the voltage supply. The biased signal is sent to the positive input terminal of an operational amplifier 96. The operational amplifier 96 may be any of a number of operational amplifiers already known in the art. An example of such an operational amplifier is a T L 0 8 2 operational amplifier. The negative input of this op amp is from a reference voltage source 9 7. In the specific embodiment of this exemplary type, the reference voltage source is composed of a 10 ohm ohm potentiometer 98, which is connected in series to two 10 ohm ohms Between the resistors 100 and 102, these two 10 ohm resistors 100 and 102 are respectively connected to the ground and the supply voltage source. A 0.47 microfarad capacitor 104 is used to stabilize the output of the reference voltage. As will be understood by those skilled in the art, the operational amplifier 96 functions as a comparator for an input signal and a reference voltage. Generally, the voltage reference is adjusted so that its number is slightly lower than the maximum input signal voltage from the second charging board 66. As a result, when the input signal voltage from the charging board is less than the reference voltage, the output of the operational amplifier is low, and when the input signal voltage from the charging board is greater than the reference voltage, the output of the operational amplifier is high. Where the input signal is a periodic signal, the output of a square wave 'operational amplifier 96 like the one generated by the first electrical system 38 will be a similar periodic signal. Ran 29 ^ -------- Order --------- Line {Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) This paper size applies the Chinese Painting National Standard (CNS) A4 specification ( 210x 297 public love) 458862 Α7 Β7 Consumption by employees of the Intellectual Property Office of the Ministry of Economic Affairs ^ First ^ Shanghai & V. Description of the invention (V ° |) When the user touches the saw blade, the maximum input signal voltage will be reduced Below the reference voltage 'the output of the op amp no longer rises. The output of the operational amplifier 96 is coupled to a charging circuit 106. The charging circuit 106 includes a 240 pico farad capacitor 108 connected between the output terminal of the operational amplifier 96 and the ground. ~ 100 0 ohm ohmic discharge resistors 1 12 are connected to the capacitor 108. When the output of the operational amplifier 96 is high, the capacitor 108 is charged. In contrast, when the output of the operational amplifier 96 is low, the charge from the capacitor 108 is discharged through the discharge resistor 11 12 with a time constant of about 24 microseconds. Therefore, unless capacitor 108 is repeatedly charged by a pulse from the operational amplifier, the pressure from the stomach on capacitor 108 will be released to less than the supply in about 25 to 50 microseconds to the original stomach. The pressure is half the size. A diode 1 1 0 prevents the capacitor from discharging into the fj operational amplifier 9 6. Diode 1 1 0 can be any of a number of suitable diodes already known in the art, such as the i N 9 1 4 diode. It will be appreciated that the discharge time required for capacitor 108 can be adjusted by selecting a different number of capacitors or different number of resistors 1 12. As explained above, if the detected signal is received without substantially attenuating from its reference voltage at the operational amplifier 96, the charging circuit 106 will be repeatedly charged and will cross the capacitor 108. The voltage will remain high. The voltage from the capacitor 108 is applied to the negative input terminal of the operational amplifier 1 1 4. The operational amplifier 1 1 4 can be any of many suitable deviating amplifiers that are well known in this technical field. 30 This paper size is applicable to the national standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) ~ 'read first Note on the back then fill out this buy}- < ° _-Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economics B7 V. Description of the invention) Any of them, such as a T L 0 8 2 operational amplifier. The positive input terminal of the operational amplifier 1 1 4 is connected to a reference voltage, which is approximately equal to half the supply voltage. In the exemplary embodiment shown in FIG. 3, the reference voltage is provided by a reference voltage source 97. If the 'charging circuit 106' is recharged, the output of the operational amplifier 1 1 4 will be low. However, if the output of operational amplifier 9 6 does not rise for a period of 25 to 50 microseconds, the voltage across capacitor 108 will decay to less than the reference voltage, and operational amplifier 1 1 4 will output a high Signal indicating contact between the user's body and the saw blade. As will be explained in more detail below, the output signal from the operational amplifier 11 4 is connected to activate the brake system 34 and stop the saw blade. The length of time between contact and braking can be adjusted by selecting the time constant of capacitor 108 and resistor 12. It should be noted that depending on the size, structure and number of teeth on the blade and the area in contact with the operator, the electrical contact between the operator and the blade may be intermittent. Therefore, the system needs to detect contact in less than or less than a single jagged contact with a user's finger or other body part. For example, suppose a 10-inch blade rotates at 3600 revolutions per minute, and the contact distance is about a quarter of an inch (about the width of a finger), a point on the surface of the blade , Such as the tip of a sawtooth, will be in contact with the user for about 100 microseconds. After this period of contact, there will generally be a non-contact period until the next sawtooth reaches the finger. The length of the contact and non-contact periods will depend on various factors, such as the number of teeth on the blade and the speed of rotation of the blade. A -------- order '-------- line (please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297) %> 4 5 8 B 6,-A7 B7 Economy Zou Intellectual Property Bureau Printed by Consumer Consumption Cooperatives V. Invention Description (/) Allows the system to detect contact with the first sawtooth Although it is not necessary, it is more This is a good way because the time interval to the second sawtooth may be quite long for a blade with relatively few sawtooths. Furthermore, 'any delay in detection will increase the cutting depth β experienced by the operator. Therefore, In this exemplary embodiment, the charging circuit is designed to attenuate within about 25 to 50 microseconds to ensure that the second thoron system 8 8 is able to prevent the It can also respond to instantaneous contact. In particular, the edger is architecturally designed to generate a 200 kHz signal with a pulse approximately every 5 microseconds. As a result, many pulses of the input signal occur during each contact To increase the reliability of contact detection . Another alternative is 'the oscillator and charging circuit can be designed to make the detection system respond faster or slower. Generally speaking' is to maximize the reliability of contact detection However, 'to minimize the possibility of detection errors. Those skilled in the art will understand that' the saw blade 6 4 should be isolated from ground to allow the input signal to It is coupled from the charging plate 62 to the second charging plate 66. In the exemplary embodiment shown in FIG. 4, the saw blade 64 is electrically separated from the mandrel 7 for installing the saw blade. 0, so the blade is isolated from the ground and other structural parts of the machine. There are many suitable designs to provide electrical isolation between the saw blade and the mandrel. These designs can be changed depending on the special structure of the machine 10. For example, if for a 5/8 inch diameter mandrel 7 0, the saw blade 6 4 can be provided with a hole of 1 inch diameter, in this 1 inch diameter 32 --------- ---- -------Order -------- I line (Please read the Please fill in this page for the matters needing attention.) This paper size is in accordance with Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210x 297 mm) Δ7 458882 ------__ B7____ 5. Description of the invention (> 0) A hole is provided with a 3/1 6-inch thick cylindrical plastic bushing 7 2 'as shown in Figure 4. Insulating washers 7, 4, 7 6 are arranged on either side of the saw blade to connect the saw blade to the spindle The flange 78 is isolated from the mandrel washer 80. These insulating washers should be thick enough so that only a negligible amount of capacitance can be generated between the saw blade and the ground mandrel flange and pad. This thickness is generally about 1/8 inch, although, depending on other factors, '1/3 2 inches or less may be suitable. In addition, it is also possible to manufacture all or part of the mandrel elements, such as ceramics, from non-conductive materials to reduce or eliminate the need to electrically isolate the happy mandrel. A spindle nut 82 secures the entire saw blade assembly to the spindle 70. The frictional force generated by locking the spindle nut 82 allows torque to be transmitted from the spindle to the saw blade of the saw. It is better, but not necessary: if the brakes cause the machine to stop abruptly, the saw blade can slide slightly on the mandrel to reduce the mass that must be blocked, and reduce damage to the saw blade, mandrel, and / Or other components in the drive system of the saw. Furthermore, it may be desirable to make these bushings from a material that is sufficiently flexible to become shackled when the saw blade is suddenly stopped. For example, when the brake is activated, depending on the type of braking system used, a substantial radial impact load can be transmitted to the mandrel. A deformable bushing can be used to absorb part of these impacts and reduce the chance of damage to the mandrel. In addition, the appropriate braking position and the deformable bushing can be used to move the library away from the user when the braking action is triggered 'as will be discussed further in detail below. 33 Use the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (21〇x 297 ---- (Please read the precautions on the back before filling in this page) Order · -line · Member of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economy χ " ΐ I ρΐ Ministry of Economy Wisdom Application section of the property bureau employee's consumption agreement; '4- 5 08 6 2 A7 ------------ package_____ V. Description of the invention I) In a specific embodiment of the alternative, the mandrel and / or it The -part of the support frame is electrically isolated from the ground, rather than the pavilion from the mandrel. The advantage of this embodiment— 帛: If the pin is electrically connected to the mandrel, then the mandrel itself can be used to capacitively couple the input signal from the charging plate 62 to the second charging. Board 6 6. Although, the specific execution method for an alternative embodiment will change with the structure of the cutting tool, an exemplary execution method is illustrated in FIG. As shown in FIG. 5, the saw blade 64 is directly mounted on the spindle 70. As shown in Fig. 4, the saw blade is fixed to the mandrel by a mandrel flange 78, a mandrel washer 80 and a mandrel nut 82. The mandrel is supported by a pair of bearings 7 and 9 arranged separately along the longitudinal axis of the mandrel and can be rotated. However, the bearing 7 9 does not directly contact the "mandrel" and is disposed between the mandrel and the bearing with an electrically insulating bush 8 4. The bearing 7 9 is installed in a mandrel movable block 8. The mandrel movable block 8 1 The saw blade can be raised and lowered, and it can also be tilted for cutting at an oblique angle. A motor (not shown) drives the spindle through a belt 8 3 wound on a pulley 8 6. The pulley 8 6 is arranged on the opposite end of the mandrel to the saw blade. The belt 8 3 is generally made of a non-conductive material, so the mandrel is not electrically coupled (connected) with the ground wire. It can be made of any suitable material that is relatively durable and non-conductive. These materials include: plastic, ceramic, etc. The insulating bushing 84 can be designed to be mounted on a mandrel with a fixed diameter, as shown in the figure, Alternatively, the mandrel may be provided with grooves to accommodate these bushings, so that the 34 paper sizes are applicable to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm)} .. M. 乂 ---- ---- Order --------- Line --- (Please read the notes on the back before filling Page) Consumption of Intellectual Property of Employees in the Ministry of Economic Affairs, Fi • Medium 45 88 B 2 A7 ---___ B7_____ V. Description of Invention (> X) The outer diameter of the bushing is flush with the outer diameter of the mandrel. It can be understood that there are many other arrangements for electrically isolating (insulating) the mandrel. Here are some examples: an insulating bush 84 can be provided on the bearing 7 9 and the mandrel movable block 8 1 Or, at least some of these bearings can be made of non-conductive material. Another alternative is that a larger part of the spindle assembly can be isolated from the rest of the saw. In any case, the charging plate 62 and the charging plate 66 are arranged along the side of the mandrel, but are slightly separated from the mandrel. These charging plates generally have a shape and arrangement corresponding to the mandrel to ensure Sufficient capacitance is combined. For example, these charging plates may be provided with a slot shape so as to be able to fit the cylindrical shape of the mandrel, as shown in Figure 5. Another alternative is that these charging plates may be ring-shaped so as to be able to The axis that completely surrounds the mandrel The periphery of the divided part. The charging board is generally supported on the mandrel movable block 81, such as by a fixed seat 85 extending from the frame. This arrangement ensures that when the position or angle of the saw blade is adjusted These charging plates will move back and forth with the mandrel. The fixing base is often designed to electrically isolate the charging plate from the frame. Because the charging plate is not biased like a saw blade when in use Fold, so these charging pads can be placed very close to the mandrel ', so smaller charging pads can be used. Although a number of example designs have been described above which can capacitively couple the charging pad to the mandrel, It is understood in this description that there are many appropriate arrangements to achieve the above-mentioned purpose, and the present invention is not limited to a specific design. For example, there is not enough 35 t between the two bearings, or between the bearing and the belt— I nnnnn (I nn I nn I · nnnnn KI ′ 5J * ϋ I i * 1 nnn 1 ln (Please read the note on the back first Please fill in this page again for this matter) This paper size applies Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 g) 4 5 8 B 6 2 A7 Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs _______B7 V. Invention Description )) In the case of space, a charging board or one of the charging boards can be placed on the other side of the pulley (as shown in Figure 5). Alternatively, a direct, non-capacitive electrical connection to the saw blade can be maintained to detect the capacitive load of the user when in contact. Turning attention now to the braking system 34, there are many possible ways to stop the saw blade 6 4 when the contact detection system 32 2 signals that the user is in contact with the saw blade. In a specific embodiment, the brake system 34 includes one or more pawls that are architecturally designed to move into contact with the blade and bring the blade immediately to a stop. These pawls are generally placed relatively close to the pavilion to reduce the time required to move the pawls into contact with the saw blade. A driving mechanism can respond to the output signal of the contact detection system 32, and move the pawl to a position in contact with the wrong piece. These claws can engage any one or more portions of the saw blade ' including teeth, sides, and the like. Another alternative is: if the saw blade is firmly attached to the mandrel, these pawls can engage the mandrel to stop the blade from rotating when the mandrel is to be stopped suddenly. Some mandrel assemblies include a mandrel flange 7 8 'with a pin 7 7 which extends parallel to the mandrel shaft 70 and engages one of the saw blades separated from the center hole Inside the hole, as represented by the dotted line in Figure 4. If a bolt is provided, the bolt 7 7 may be a shear pin 'in order to allow the saw blade to be stopped momentarily without also stopping the spindle. A specific embodiment of an exemplary brake system 34 is shown in FIG. It will be clear from this description: 36 '-------- Order --------- line ---- I of the various components of the brake system Please fill in this page again.) This paper is published in Chinese National Standard Year (CNS) A4 specification d10K297.) Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 5 88 6 2 A7 ___B7 V. Description of the invention () 10 :) Design can change with the architecture of a particular cutting tool. As shown in the figure, a separate brake pawl 1 40 is pivotably mounted across a shoulder bolt 1 4 2 and is mounted to the saw frame. The shoulder bolt 1 4 2 is screwed in Or a sawing machine frame fixed to an adjacent saw blade. The pawl is mounted to engage the teeth on the periphery of the saw blade. The end of the pawl adjacent to the saw blade may be provided with a bevel or a shape that ensures that the pawl fully and immediately engages the tooth when it touches the tooth. In addition, the shape of the pawl can be designed so that once it comes into contact with the teeth, the action of the saw blade can further pivot the pawl and drive the pawl closer to the teeth. In this exemplary embodiment, the drive mechanism includes a spring 130, which is designed to press the free end of the pawl against the blade. Generally speaking, the shape of the spring should be able to apply a continuous force to the pawl in the direction of the saw blade once the brake system is activated. This will ensure that the pawl does not jump back from where it touched the blade. It will be apparent from this description that the present invention can use many different spring-shaped architectures, including: compression springs, tension springs, torsion springs, and the like. In this exemplary embodiment, the spring is made of a length of 1/8 inch piano wire, and the central part is wound into a wire 圏 1 3 2 and stands across a bolt (not shown in the figure). ) It forms part of the frame of the sawing machine. However, other sizes and types of wire may be suitable. Wire-controlled nose landing gears used on radio-controlled aircraft are another example of a suitable spring. In any case, the spring is pressed against the pawl to force the pawl against the saw blade. Generally speaking, the spring will exert a force of 1 to 500 pounds on the pawl, and a force of 15 to 100 pounds 37, Λ -------- order ----- ---- Line (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) 4 5 88 62 Member of Intellectual Property Bureau, Ministry of Economic Affairs 11-Xiao Cha t pit A7 B7 i, invention description (Qy) force is more suitable. Larger forces provide faster activation, but also make the system for releasing the pawl more complicated. In the illustrated embodiment, one end of the spring is biased against another bolt 1 3 4 mounted on the saw frame. The opposite end of the spring 130 from the bolt 1 3 4 is in contact with the free end of the brake pawl 140. The reels 1 3 2 and the bolts 1 3 4 are arranged in a position capable of bending the spring against the pawl even if the pawl is in contact with the saw blade. A restraining member 1 2 2 holds the spring in a slightly more bent state so that the pawl can be slightly pivoted away from the saw blade during normal use. When the contact detection system 32 issues an output signal indicating that contact between the user and the blade occurs, the restricting member releases a spring that drives the pawl to engage it with the blade. If the brake system 34 is activated and the spring is released, the system can reset the system by pulling the spring away from the pawl and reconnecting and / or replacing the restricting member. The limiting component 1 2 2 can be designed in many different architectural forms. Generally speaking, the restricting member is designed to truly release the spring instantaneously upon receiving an output signal from the detection system. In this exemplary embodiment, the restriction member 1 2 2 is formally a fusible member or a fusible wire. The fusible element 1 2 2 is connected to an ignition system 115 (which will be described in detail below) which fuses the wire in response to an output signal from the detection circuit. Once the wire is fused, the spring is released and the drive pawl snaps into the blade. To reset this example brake system, you need to install a new fusible 38 {Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) kSJ · _. Line-This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 χ 297 mm) 4 5 88 6 2 A7 _ B7 I V. Description of the invention (y4) Break the component to keep the spring in the state of leaving the library piece. At the same time, the pawl can be replaced. The fusible member 1 2 2 may be any one of many materials well known in this technical field. For example, a suitable fusible element is a 0 ' 010 inch diameter nichrome wire or a steel strand. In general, such a fusible member should have a high tensile strength such that the strength can be maximized compared to the heat required to fuse the member. In this exemplary embodiment, a loop is formed at each end of the wire. The overall overall length is generally less than about 1 inch, and there is a fuse zone of about 1/16 to 1/2 inch between the two rings. Short fuses are useful for concentrating power in a small area when the brake is activated. It may be more desirable to make the fusible member from a larger wire with a reduced waist section ' This may achieve a higher current density in the waist section for more concentrated thermal energy. One end ring of the fusible element of the Ministry of Economic Affairs is connected to the brake bias spring 1 3 0 opposite to the bolt 1 3 4. The other end of the ring is installed in an electrically insulated contact post 136 °. When a current is applied to the contact post 136, it flows through the fusible member and reaches the spring 130. The conductivity of the springs and bolts electrically connects the fuse to a grounded sawing machine frame. Therefore, when the current is sent to the contact post 136, it flows through the fusible member and reaches the grounded sawing machine frame. When sufficient current is supplied, the fusible member will melt and release the spring to drive the pawl against the saw blade. It can be understood from this description: According to the paper size of this Form 39, the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) is applicable. 458862 The Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 'employee consumption cooperation agreement A7 ___ B7_____ 5' invention description) Invented, there are many different methods for the arrangement of the fusible member. As an illustrative example, one loop of the wire can be attached to the contact post 1 36, while the other loop at the opposite end is fixed to a ground post C (not shown in the figure). If the midpoint of the wire bushing is placed beyond the end of the spring adjacent to the pawl, the spring is released when the wire is melted. In this design, the current that melts the fusible member only passes through the fusible member from the contact post and into the ground post. It will be understood from this description that the size of the fusible member will depend at least in part on the force required to limit the spring. In general, larger spring forces are preferred to increase the speed and force with which the pawl contacts the saw blade. Where more pressure is required, a larger diameter fusible member may be required, thereby requiring a larger amount of current to fuse the fusible member. In the exemplary embodiment shown in FIG. 2, the The spring—usually 15 to 15 pounds of force—pushes against the fusible member, and when released, pushes against the brake pawl. It should be understood that a wide range of forces and mechanisms 1 can be used to move the pawl, and this range of forces can be up to hundreds of pounds or more. In some environments, it may also be desirable to use a two-stage release system, as is used in many catchers, to reduce the force required for the fusible member. Please refer to FIG. 28 below. This allows the use of ~ smaller straight oblong stemable breakable wires that can be fused more quickly and with less sudden changes in current. As described above, the fusible element 1 2 2 is fused by an ignition system 1 1 5 (shown in FIG. 3), which is 1 1 5 __ 40 ---------- ^- --I ---- (Please read the notes on the back before filling in this page) The paper size applies the Chinese national standard 7 ^^ · Specifications (210 X 297 mm) 45 8862 B7 V. Description of the invention (3 ( f) Generate a sudden current pulse to the fusible element 1 2 2 in response to the output signal of the contact detection system 32. For the exemplary type of fusible element described above, about 20 to 100 amperes are required Current to ensure complete and rapid fuse. As those skilled in the art will understand: there are many circuits that can be adapted to provide such a current surge. The specific embodiment of the exemplary ignition system 115 shown in Figure 3 Including ~ or more charge storage devices, these charge storage devices are discharged through the fusible member 1 2 2 in response to the output signal of the second electrical system 88. The use of the charge storage device eliminates the need for a large current supply source To fuse the need for the fusible member 1 2 2. However, as will be understood from this description: a current supply source can be used to replace the charge storage device. Alternatively, other devices can also be used to supply the required current. These devices include a silicon Controlled rectifier or triac. The ignition system of the exemplary embodiment includes a pair of relatively high current transistors 1 1 8 which are connected to store the current stored in the storage device. It is transmitted to the fusible element 1 2 2. The transistor i 丄 8 is turned on when it receives the output signal of the second electrical circuit 88. As shown in Fig. 3, the output terminal of the operational amplifier 1 1 4 is a 1 〇 仟The ohmic resistor 1 1 6 is connected to the ground and to the gate of transistor 丄 丄 8. Any suitable transistor can be used, such as this—the IRFZ40 MOSFET, which is well known in the technical field. Crystals. These transistors are connected in parallel between the charge storage device 120 and the fusible element 12 2. In this exemplary embodiment, the charge storage device 12 is a 7 5 0 in form. 0 0 microfarad Pull Capacitor Pack 41 This paper size is applicable to Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 public love) (Please read the precautions on the back before filling out this page). Employees of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs Consumption He Jianjiang 45 8b A7 B7 Member of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 1-1 Consumption ·· ρϊ 5. Invention Description (q). A 1000 ohm resistor 1 2 4 connected to a 24 volt supply source is used to establish and maintain the capacitor. The charge on the group. When the output of the operational amplifier 1 1 4 rises, the transistor 1 1 8 allows the charge stored in the capacitor bank to pass through the fusible member 1 2 2 β and the charge stored in the capacitor bank. The abruptly released element heats the rupturable member 12 to reach its melting point in approximately 1 to 5 milliseconds. Alternatively, one or more transistors can be replaced by other switching devices, such as a silicon controlled rectifier (S C R). One of the advantages of using stored charge to melt the fusible member 1 2 is that the ignition system does not depend on the electrical capacity of the power line or the phase of the power line voltage. As explained above, the contact between the user's body and the teeth of the saw blade 64 may be intermittent, depending on the size and arrangement of the teeth. Although, the second electrical system 88 is generally designed to detect a contact time as short as 25 to 50 microseconds. Once the first saw tooth of the saw blade passes through the user's body, The signal received by the second electrical circuit may return to the normal state until the next saw tooth contacts the user's body. As a result, although the output signal of the operational amplifier 1-4 will increase due to the first contact, once the first contact is completed, the output signal may return to a low potential state. If the output signal is not kept in the high potential state for a long enough time to fully discharge the charge in the charge storage device, the fusible member 1 2 2 may not be melted. Therefore, the second electrical system 88 can be provided with a charging circuit 1 1 7 similar to the charging circuit 10 6 on the output of the operational amplifier 1 1 4. Once the operational amplifier 1 1 4 generates a high-potential output signal, charge 42 -------- I ------ (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) This paper size applies China National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) A7 4 5 8 B 6 2 ______B7____ 5. Description of the invention (ί ^ 〇) The function of the circuit 117 is to ensure that the output signal will be maintained at a high potential. For a long time to fully discharge the charge storage device, the fusible member 1 2 2 is melted. In this exemplary embodiment, the charging circuit 117 includes a 0.47 microfarad capacitor 119 connected between the output terminal of the operational amplifier 114 and a ground ground. When the output of the operational amplifier 1 1 4 rises, the 0.4 7 microfarad capacitor 1 1 9 is charged to the potential of the output signal. If the output of the operational amplifier 1 1 4 returns to a low level, the voltage across the capacitor 1 1 9 will be discharged through the 10 ohm resistor 116 with a large time constant of about 4.7 milliseconds. One such as a 1 N 9 1 4 diode prevents the capacitor 1 1 9 from discharging through the operational amplifier 1 1 4. The above system is able to detect the occurrence of contact ' within about 50 microseconds and release the brake within approximately one to three milliseconds. The brake then contacts the saw blade in approximately one to three milliseconds. The saw blade normally stops after a brake engagement of no more than 2 to 10 milliseconds. As a result, if the cutting tool is accidentally touched, the injury to the operator can be minimized. By properly selecting components, the present invention can stop the operation of the saw blade in 1 millisecond or less. Another way is, depending on various parameters, such as spring force, claw size and shape, saw blade type, saw blade speed, etc., the brake system is designed on the architecture at 5 ms, 10 ms, Stop the blade in 15 milliseconds, 20 milliseconds, or 50 milliseconds. Although, the first electrical system 38, the second electrical system 88, and the exemplary embodiment of the ignition system 115 have been provided with a specific number 43 (please read the precautions on the back before filling in this purchase) f. Consumption of employees of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs ^ The paper standard is applicable to the national standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 297); II) Consumption of employees of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs. Grade HS 88 6 2 Α7 I ----------- B7___ V. Specific elements of the invention description (Battle 1) and described in a specific architecture arrangement as described above. 'It can be understood from the description of the present invention that these systems can be based on a certain The actual needs or preferences of a particular application are built in a variety of different shape architectures, components, and data. The above-mentioned shape architecture, components, and data are only used for the purpose of describing a specific embodiment that has been proved to be effective. They should be regarded as the description of the present invention and not the limitation of the present invention. FIG. 6 illustrates another alternative embodiment of the first electrical system 38, the second electrical system 88, and the ignition system 115, which may form part of the safety stop mechanism 30 of the present invention. . This alternative first electrical system 38 is architecturally designed to be able to use a separate comparator 400, such as the LM 3 9 3 comparator, to produce a square wave. A 1 million ohm resistor 402 is connected between the high-potential input of the comparator 402 and the ground. Another 1 million ohm resistor 404 is connected between the high potential input terminal of the comparator 400 and a low voltage supply source V. A 1 million ohm resistor 406 is connected between the high-potential input of the comparator and the output of the comparator. A 10 0 picofarad capacitor 4 0 8 is connected between the low potential input of the comparator and the ground ground. A 27 ohm resistor 4 1 0 is connected between the low-potential input terminal of the comparator and the output terminal of the comparator. A 3.3 ohm resistor 412 is connected between the low voltage supply source V and the output of the comparator. The alternative oscillator circuit shown in Figure 6 produces a square wave with a frequency of approximately 50 Q k h z. A 1 ohm resistor 4.14 is connected between the comparator output and the shielded cable 60 to reduce transient oscillations. It can be understood from this description: These 44 paper sizes are applicable to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 x 297 mm) -'------- Order --------- line --r : (Please read the precautions on the back before filling out this page) Consumer cooperation of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs; M 5. Invention description The number of one or more components of an alternative first electrical system 38 can be changed In order to generate signals with different frequencies, different waveforms, etc., as in the above-mentioned exemplary embodiment, the signal generated by the alternative first electrical system 38 is sent to a cable with a shielding effect. The line 60 reaches the charging pad 62. This signal is capacitively coupled to the second charging plate 66 through the saw blade 64. An alternative second electrical system 88 receives a signal from the second charging board 6 6 via a shielded cable 9 0 and compares the signal with a reference voltage. If the signal falls below the reference voltage for a period of about 25 microseconds, an output signal is generated indicating that contact between the saw blade and the user's body has occurred. An alternative second electrical system 8 8 includes a voltage divider 91, which is composed of a 2 2 ohm resistor 4 1 6 and a 2 2 ohm resistor 4 1 8 of. This voltage divider 91 applies a bias to a signal received via the cable 90, so that it reaches half the low voltage supply source V. Since the low-frequency signal is attenuated, the low resistance of the resistors 4 1 6 and 4 1 8 is used to reduce the noise of 60 Hz relative to the resistors 9 2 and 9 4. The biased signal is sent to a low-potential input of a second comparator 4 2 0 such as a 1 M 3 9 3 comparator. The positive terminal of the second comparator 4 2 0 is connected to a reference voltage source 4 2 2. In the illustrated specific embodiment, the reference voltage source is a 10 ohm ohm potentiometer. 4 2 4 is connected in series between two 100 ohm resistors 4 2 6 and 4 2 8 The resistors 4 2 6 and 4 2 8 are respectively connected to 45. This paper size is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (2J10 X 297 mm) III nnn I »nnnn I -Λ nnn II» I-5J * It ni II It n 1 (Please read the notes on the back before filling out this page) A7 B7 Consumption Cooperation of Employees of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs " 5th Generation
45 88$ 五、發明說明（0) 低電壓供給源V和地線。一個〇 · 1微法拉電容器4 3 0穩 定該參考電壓的輸出。如同先前—般，該參考電壓是被用 來調整觸發點的。 第二比較器4 2 0的輸出端是被連接到一個譬如是2 N 3 9 0 4電晶體之η Ρ η型雙極結型電晶體4 3 1的基 極端。該電晶體4 3 1的基極端也經由一個1 〇 〇仟歐姆 電阻器4 3 2被連接到低電壓供給源V ’以及透過一個2 2 0微微法拉電容器4 3 4被連接到接地之地線。電位器 4 3 2被調整以便在第二比較器4 2 0正極端的電壓稍低 於當鋸片和使用者身體之間沒有發生接觸的時候在第二比 較器的負極端所收到信號高峰。因此，信號的每一個高循 環引起第二比較器4 2 0的輸出爲低電位，而使2 2 0微 微法拉電容器4 3 4放電。只要在鋸片和使用者身體之間 沒有接觸發生，第二比較器4 2 0的輸出繼續保持爲低電 位，防止電容器4 3 4透過電阻器4 3 2充電而將η ρ η 型雙極結型電晶體4 3 1接通。然而，當使用者的身體碰 觸到鋸片的時候，在第二比較器4 2 0負極端收到的信號 維持在低於在正極端處的參考電壓，而第二比較器4 2 0 的輸出保持在高電位。結果，電容器4 3 4能夠透過電阻 器4 3 2進行充電，並且接通電晶體4 3 1。 電晶體4 3 1的集極端被連接到低電壓供給源V，然 而，它的射極端被連接到6 8 0歐姆電阻器4 3 6。當電 晶體4 3 1被接通的時候，它透過電阻器4 3 6供給一個 大約4 0毫安培的輸出信號，該輸出信號被送往替代性之 46 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210 X 297公釐） (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁> . 丨線· A7 B7 88 62 五、發明說明（fp 點火系統1 1 5。該替代性之點火電路1 1 5包括有被連 接在一個高電壓供給源Η V和一個譬如是ντε 5 5 5 2 S C R的矽可控整流器4 3 8之間的可熔斷構件1 2 2。 該矽可控整流器的閘極端是被連接到電阻器4 3 6。因此 ’當電晶體4 3 1被接通的時候’大約4 〇毫安培的電流 通過電阻器4 3 6啓動矽可控整流器4 3 8 ’容許該高電 壓供給源ΗV透過可熔斷構件1 2 2放電到接地之地線。 一旦該矽可控整流器被接通’只要通過可熔斷構件1 2 2 的電流維持在高於大約4 0毫安培的保持電流以上，即使 通往閘極端的電流消失，它將仍然繼續發生作用°因此’ 該矽可控整流器將引導電流通過該可熔斷構件直到該可熔 斷構件化被熔化或高電壓源消失爲止。 圖6也說明一個範例型之電氣供給系統4 4 0 ’該電 氣供給系統4 4 0在架構上被設計成能夠從標準的1 2 〇 V A C電壓線路提供低電壓供給源V和高電壓供給源Η V 兩種電壓供給源。電氣供給系統4 4 0被連接上以對於替 代性之第一電氣系統3 8、替代性之第二電氣系統8 8、 和替代性之點火系統115提供低電壓供給源V和高電壓 供給源Η V。該電壓線路經由一個1 〇 〇歐姆電阻器4 4 2和一個像是1 Ν 4 0 0 2二極體之二極體4 4 4被連接 到一個1 0 0 0微法拉電荷儲存電容器4 4 6。該二極體 只通過電壓線的正極部份，藉此將電容器4 4 6加以充電 ，使達到相對於地線大約1 6 0伏特的電位。電容器4 4 47 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS〉A4規格（210 X 297公釐） (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 訂！ -線· 經濟部智慧財產局員^Ρ之 45 88 62 A7 B7 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合乍£ρϊ 五、發明說明 6的正極端被用作爲連接到可熔斷構件1 2 2的高電壓供 給源ΗV。當偵測得到鋸片和使用者的身體之間發生接觸 而接通矽可控整流器4 3 8的時候’儲存在電容器4 4 6 裏的電荷通過可熔斷構件1 2 2而被放電’直到該可熔斷 構件1 2 2熔化爲止。由本說明可明白：電容器4 4 6的 大小可以依照實際需要改變來供給熔可熔斷構件1 2 2所 必須要有的電流量。由本說明應該注意到：使用一個高電 壓HV電容器會導致一個遠較大的電流突波，並且因而可 以達到比以低電壓系統所能達到的更爲快速地熔化該可熔 斷構件。 電容器4 4 6的正極端也提供一個較少變壓器的電壓 源以作爲低電壓供給源V，該低電壓供給源V包括有一個 連接於電容器4 4 6之正極端和一個負4 0伏特之齊納二 極體4 5 0之間的1 2仟歐姆電阻器4 4 8。二極體4 5 0的作用是要在該二極體和電阻器4 4 8之間的接合點處 維持一個相對固定的4 〇伏特電位。從本說明中當可明白 :通過該1 2仟歐姆電阻器的電流將是大約1 〇毫安培。 這個電流其中大部份是被該低電壓電路所使用，該低電壓 電路具有一個約爲8毫安培之相對固定的電流需求。應注 意=:雖然，電阻器4 4 8和二極體4 5 0從電容器4 4 6晏釋放出一些電流，然而，電壓供給線路仍然繼續地對 該電容器進行再充電，以維持高電壓供給Η V。一個〇. 1微法拉電容器4 5 2被並聯於二極體4 5 0 ’以提供該 48 (請先閱讀背面之沒意事項再填寫本頁) 本紙張尺度朝令國國家標準（CNS)A4規[^7'297公爱） --------訂---------^i:---------------------- 8 8 0 p 。 A7 I--------B7__ ______ 五、發明說明（¢4)) (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 二極體的4 0伏特電壓之緩衝，該二極體然後被連接到譬 如是L Μ 3 1 7電壓穩壓器的可調式穩壓器4 5 4的輸入 端。被連接在該輸出端和調整端之間的一個1仟歐姆電阻 器4 5 6和被連接在調整端和地線之間的—個2 2仟歐姆 電阻器4 5 8 ’匕們的比例將可調式穩壓器4 5 4的輸出 電壓設定在大約3 Ο V D C的電壓値。一個5 〇微法拉電 容器4 6 0被連接到可調式穩壓器4 5 4的輸出端，以暫 存足夠的電荷，確保該低電壓供給源V能夠提供接通矽可 控整流器4 3 8所需要的短促4 0毫安培脈衝。前述之低 電壓供給源由於它的低成本和結構簡單所以是有利的。 「丨線. 應注意到：當高電壓供給源Η V通過可熔斷構件1 2 2被放電的時候，連接到可調式穩壓器4 5 4的輸入電壓 可能暫時地下降到低於3 0伏特以下，因而藉此，引起低 電壓供給源V裏的一個對應下降。然而，因爲刹車系統已 經被觸發，對於偵測系統，它不再需要繼續地如前述般作 用，而任何在低電壓供給源V裏的下降將不傷害到安全止 動機構3 0的作用功能。 經^部智慧財產局員工消費^乍土沪受 熟悉電氣技術領域之人士當可明白：第一電氣系統3 8、第二電氣系統8 8、點火系統1 1 5、和電氣供給系 統4 4 0的替代性具體實施例可以被放在一個單一的基片 或一個單一的封裝內執行。另外，以上所說明的各種電氣 電路元件的特定數値可以視其用途予以改變。 圖7說明剎車系統3 4的一個替代性之設計，該刹車 系統3 4在架構上係被設計成能夠利用點火系統1 1 5將 49 本紙張尺度適用中®國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210 X 297公釐） 經濟部智慧財產局員%.凉費乍土 _2 A7 _ B7__ 五、發明說明（¢^)) 所供應的電流集中到可熔斷構件1 2 2的一個非常小的區 域上。替代性之剎車系統3 4包括有一個剎車掣爪1 4 0 ，該刹車掣爪1 4 0的位置設定在能夠在彈簧1 3 0的驅 動之下與鋸片6 4相嚙合，該彈簧1 3 0是被擠壓在掣爪 和一個彈簧塊4 7 0之間。該掣爪受到可熔斷構件1 2 2 的影響推抵住刹車彈簧1 3 0的作用力而被保持在與鋸片 略爲分開之狀態。該可熔斷構件1 2 2是附著到掣爪上， 譬如是將它圈繞在一個設置在該掣爪上的鉤子4 7 2上。 另一方式是，該可熔斷構件可以利用一個螺絲或其它已揭 示的機構將它固定到掣爪。 該可熔斷構件1 2 2也圈繞在一個高壓接觸線柱4 7 4和一個放電接觸線柱4 7 6的四周。這個高壓接觸線柱 4 7 4係被連接到電氣供給系統4 4 0的高電壓供給源Η V上，然而，該放電接觸線柱4 7 6是被連接到替代性之 點火系統1 1 5的矽可控整流器4 3 8。當矽可控整流器 4 3 8被接通的時候，由高電壓供給源ΗV供給的電荷主 要通過線柱4 7 4和4 7 6之間的一小段可熔斷構件4 7 8進行放電。這被用作爲集中放電電流到可熔斷構件1 2 2的一個相對較小部份，確保以較少的儲存電荷可以完全 並且快速地熔化掉該可熔斷構件。一般而言，是希望能夠 讓該段可熔斷構件4 7 8儘可能地短，以便將需要被加熱 的熔絲長度減少到最小的程度。如圖7和圖8所示，高壓 接觸線柱4 7 4和放電接觸線柱4 7 6在架構上可以被設 計成一個單一結構的相反邊而以一個絕緣層4 7 9設置在 50 -------------c--------訂---------線丨丨---------------------- {請先閲讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 本紙張尺度適用中國國家缥準（CNS)A4規格（210 X 297公釐） A7 458862 ______B7__ 五、發明說明（iff) (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 它們之間。在這些線柱之間的間隔一般是在1/6 4到1 /8英吋之間。一旦該可熔斷構件1 2 2被熔化之後，刹 車彈簧如上所述一般地將掣爪壓入到與鋸片相嚙接。。雖 然，剎車系統3 4的替代方案設計已經結合替代性之點火 系統1 1 5被說明如上，可由本發明瞭解到：替代性之刹 車系統3 4也可以結合圖3所示的點火系統1 1 5之具體 實施例一起被使用。在這種情形之中，高壓接觸線柱4 7 4將是被連接到電晶體1 1 8的發射極，然而，放電接觸 線柱4 7 6將被連接到接地地線。 -線. 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 因爲，接觸檢測系統3 2和剎車系統3 4在架構上是 被設計用來當接觸到使用者的身體的時候將切削工具14 停止下來的，也想要能夠將馬達組合件1 2停止下來，以 防止對馬達造成損壞，因爲馬達會企圖驅動切削工具。然 而’因爲機器10—般被設計成可預期當切削工具被咬住 或其它原因等等而停止下來，所以如果能夠在數秒鐘的時 間內將馬達組合件關閉經常已是足夠的了。這只要將通往 該馬達的電源切斷即可達到這個目的。因此，在一個替代 性之具體實施例裏，從第二電氣系統8 8送出的剎車啓動 is藏也被用來啓動電磁接觸器1 6之線圏電路裏的一個常 閉式開關繼電器（圖中未顯示出來）。類似於按壓停止開 關2 〇，虽吊閉式開關繼電:被作動的時候’電力自該電 磁接觸器線圏切斷，因而馬達也被切斷電源。將可從本說 明$明白：有許多其它的方法可用來關閉馬達組合件丄2 ’道些方法都包括在本發明的範圍以內。作爲一個說明例 51 本紙張尺度ϋ!1國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210 X 297 458862 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 A7 ________B7 五、發明說明) 子’通往該馬達組合件的電力可以由安纟止動機構3 〇直 接控制（例如，透過固態啓閉開關等等）。同時，僅僅只 需讓現有的過負荷電路解開以關閉停頓下來的馬達也是可 採用的方式。 因爲以上說明的偵測電路依賴人體的某些電氣特性’ 在切割某些材料像是金屬箔包覆的絕緣物的時候’使用安 全止動機構3 0可能會導致偵測電路錯誤地記錄刀具與使 用者的接觸。因此，應會想要有一個功能中斷控制，以防 止刹車在某一特定的切割作業中進行操作。一個適當的功 能中斷控制可以包括一個設置在可熔斷構件1 2 2和點火 系統1 1 5之間的機械開關。另一方式是，該開關可以是 .一種單次使用的開關，其架構是要在每一次使用後必須重 置它自身。作爲另一個替代方案，安全止動機構3 0可以 在靠近工件的地方設置有感測器，以偵知金屬箔等的出現 ’並且使刹車系統功能中斷。此—後者的替代方案免除了 使用者必須記得讓該刹車系統之功能中斷和重行恢復。 作爲另一個將安全止動機構3 0功能中止的替代性之 方法是：該接觸偵測系統可以在架構上被設計成區別金屬 和使用者身體。例如，當使用者的身體開始接觸据片的時 候’由第二電氣系統8 8收到的輸入信號被衰減，但未被 接地。然而，假如，一個金屬工件（該工件與已經接地的 機器框架相接觸）接觸到鋸片，被藕合到鋸片上的輸入信 號將被釋放到地面，以致於第二電氣系統8 8將全然不會 接收到任何信號。因此，第二電氣系統8 8可以在架構上 52 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210 X 297公釐） - ·). Λ 訂 -- (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 4〇 as^? A7 ____ B7 五、發明說明 被設計成只有在收到一個衰減的信號而該信號具有一個低 於先前預先設定的臨界値且高於一個第二臨界値的尖峰値 的時候，才會輸出一個啓動信號到點火系統1 1 5。 應可由本說明瞭解到：在本發明的一個商品化的具體 實施例裏，許多電子功能能夠被納入到一個專用積體電路 (A S I C )裏面。另外，至少一部份或全部的電子元件 可以由電池供給電力，而不是由供輸給機器的電源來供給 這些電子元件的電力。然而，熔化可熔斷構件1 2 2所需 要的電荷將較佳地由電流線路來供給，以保留電池的電力 ，並且係由於有較高的電壓可供使用。 也可能想要有一個邏輯控制系統，該系統在架構上被 設計成：當機器被接通或關閉以及在使用中的時候，可作 許多自我測試等等的安全檢查，以確保該安全止動機構3 0是正常地運作，並且防止意外地觸發刹車系統β此類的 邏輯控制系統可以利用許多方法以任何想要有的測試順序 來完成。圖9說明一個具範例型之邏輯順序的流程圖。該 範例型之順序開始於當使用者初步地供給電力給該系統， 這步驟標識以6 0 0。接著，邏輯系統如圖中以6 0 2代 表：首先檢查以判定是否在鋸片和充電板之間的間隔是正 確的。該鋸片至充電板之間的間隔可以利用任何適當的機 構來量測，像是以下更詳細說明的一般。假如，間隔超過 可接受的極限値，該系統回應以一個錯誤信號，這步驟在 流程圖中以6 0 4表示。這個錯誤信號可以是聲音的和/ 或可見的信號等等。較佳地，該邏輯系統停留在錯誤狀態 53 \/ /. '--------訂-----------Γ i (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210 X 297公釐） d 5 SB Β 2 A7 _ B7 五、發明說明（ϋ) ，並且阻止機器進一步的操作，直到偵測出正確的鋸片至 充電板之間隔爲止。 假如，鋸片至充電板的間隔是可以接受的，該邏輯系 統判定第一電氣系統是否偵測出來自第一電氣系統的適當 (也就是：未被衰減的）輸入信號，在流程圖中這步驟是 標示爲6 0 6。這個步驟確保刹車不會在機器啓動的時候 由於第一和/或第二電氣系統、已被接地的鋸片、不正確 的擺放充電板等等其中的一個故障而被意外地觸發。假如 ，沒有偵測到適當的輸入信號，該系統回應以一個錯誤信 號6 0 4，該錯誤信號在形式上可以是一個警報器，或是 閃光燈或類似的指示燈。將可明白：每—個錯誤狀況可以 使用相同的錯誤信號或不同的錯誤信號來表達。 假如，偵測出適當的輸入信號’該系統開始進行硏判 是否有一個可熔斷構件’這在流程圖中是標示爲步驟6〇 8。是否有可熔斷構件可以由任何適當的方法來判定’這 些方法包括量取高壓接觸線柱4 7 4和放電接觸線柱4 7 6之間的導電性。假如，沒有可熔斷構件呈現，該系統回 應以一個錯誤信號6 0 4。 然後，系統檢查儲存在電荷儲存裝置裏的電荷數量’ 如流程圖中的步驟6 1 2。這個步驟確保假如偵測到有接 觸發生的時候有足夠的電荷可以熔化該可熔斷構件。假如 沒有偵測到足夠的電荷，邏輯系統回應以一個錯誤信號告 知在一個預定的時間內沒有足夠的電荷量被偵測到。 在該範例型之順序裏，在預定的檢查完成以後，邏輯 54 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210 χ 297公爱） (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) I . 線. 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費^·'作社印製 45 88 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 A7 B7 五、發明說明d) 系統容許電力被送入馬達組合件1 2，如圖中之步驟6 1 4。從本說明將可瞭解到：假如沒有偵測到任何的故障， 上述之電氣順序一般是在少於一秒鐘的時間內完成。另外 ’在馬達組合件被啓動以前可以採取額外的檢查步驟。 除了一個初步的啓動電源順序以外，邏輯系統還可以 在架構上被設計成能夠在操作期間進行許多檢查。譬如， 鋸片的旋轉可以由已爲人熟知的機構來監控，而點火系統 在鋸片沒有在移動的時候可以被暫時中斷其功能。這可讓 使用者在鋸片停止的時候接觸到鋸片而不會讓掣爪嚙合於 鋸片。一些具體實施例在架構上可被設計成能確保即使通 到機器的電力被關閉且假如該鋸片仍然在繼續地旋轉，安 全止動機構將繼續發生作用。作爲一個說明的例子：假如 ，除了接觸偵測以外的錯誤發生，譬如是：不正確的館片 至充電板之間的間隔、在電荷儲存裝置上的電荷不足等等 ，通到馬達組合件的電力可以被截斷。將能從本說明中明 白：一個邏輯控制系統可以被實行來提供許多想要有的不 同安全和/或操作功能。 除了以上所說明的彈簧和可熔斷構件系統以外，其它 系統也能夠被用來移動掣爪使其接觸到鋸片。譬如，如圖 1 0所示，一個相對較小的爆炸裝藥1 5 〇，其形式上係 一個傳爆管或爆發器，能夠被用來帶動掣爪壓頂向据片。 一個適當之爆炸裝藥的例子是一個Μ- 1 〇 〇爆發器，該 爆發器可由威斯康辛州Spooner的Stresau Laboratory，Inc 公司取得。 55 ,-------I 訂----------線 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（21〇χ 297公釐） 45 88 6 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 A7 B7 五、發明說明（夂)） 爆炸裝藥致動系統的一個範例型之具體實施例是說明 在圖1 0裏。雖然，任何適當的爆炸裝藥系統都可以被採 用，然而，此一範例型之具體實施例較佳地使用一個獨立 自足的裝藥或傳爆管1 5 0，以增加安全，並且集中爆炸 之作用力在掣爪移動的方向上。一條觸發引線1 6 4從該 裝藥裏延伸出來以便引發爆炸。 藉由將爆炸裝藥1 5 0插入到掣爪和一鄰近該裝藥的 固定塊1 6 6之間，該爆炸裝藥1 5 0可被用來移動掣爪 1 4 0。當裝藥爆炸的時候，掣爪被推離開固定塊。一個 壓縮彈簧1 3 0被置於固定塊和掣爪之間，以確保在裝藥 被引爆的時候，掣爪不會從鋸片處彈回。在引爆以前，掣 爪是被保持在離開鋸片的位置，裝藥是以摩擦配合置於固 定塊和掣爪裏。然而，裝藥爆炸所產生的作用力是遠超過 克服這個摩擦配合所需的力量<另一方式是，該掣爪可藉 由其它機構被固定在離開鋸片的位置，像是：一個易碎構 件、重力、掣爪和固定塊之間的彈簧（圖中未顯示出來） 等等。從本說明中將可明白：裝藥相對於樞轉螺栓1 4 2 的位置將會決定掣爪另一端移動的距離。裝藥愈靠近樞轉 螺栓1 4 2 ’掣爪的另一端就移動得愈遠。然而，當裝藥 被移向較爲靠近螺栓的時候，因爲力矩臂變得更小，移動 該掣爪所需要的作用力大小將會增加。因而，對於一特定 數量的爆炸作用力，掣爪可能移動得較爲緩慢。 更進一步地’將可由本說明中理解到：除了以上說明 的彈簧和爆炸裝藥具體實施例之外，還有許多其它的方法 56 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4蜆格（210 X 297公爱） --------訂---------線 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 45δδ6£ Α7 ------------Β7____ 五、發明說明（Jrf) 可用來帶動該掣爪使它接觸切削工具。例如，一個直流電 磁閥能夠藉由一個電流突波作超速傳動，以產生一個快速 移動。另一個方式是，加壓的空氣缸也能夠被用來供給壓 力’以取代刹車彈簧或裝藥。掣爪可以被用作另一個替代 方案’該掣爪可被支撐在一個電磁鐵上面，該電磁鐵是由 點火系統作動的，以推斥該掣爪壓頂鋸片，或是釋放開彈 簧作動的掣爪按壓到鋸片上面。 現在要更深入地將討論集中在掣爪上，可由本說明中 埋解到：該掣爪可以由許多種材料其中之一或一個以上製 成°適當材料的例子包括像是聚碳酸酯的塑膠、橡膠和木 料等’或甚至是柔軟的金屬，像是鉛或鋁。雖然不是絕對 必要’一般都希望該掣爪能夠有足夠的強度使得鋸片不會 ί艮容易地切穿，但又需要有足夠的柔軟度，以便能夠吸收 一部份鋸片因突然停止而產生的撞擊力道。在剎車被觸發 之後’正常需要更換熔絲，以及或許也需要更換掣爪。鋸 片也會依阻擋鋸片令其停止的速度而或許受到損壞，或至 少需要將與鋸片嚙合的掣爪取下。的確，在一個替代性之 刹車系統具體實施例裏，掣爪是由一個具有足夠強度且堅 硬的材料將鋸片的鋸齒打斷，而不是阻擋鋸片令其不動。 剎車掣爪1 4 0在架構上也可以被設計成具有一個狹 長的接觸表面，該接觸表面嚙合住鋸片的很大部份。這個 替代性之架構的例子是示意地圖示在圖圖1 1至圖1 3裏 。如同可從這些圖中看出，刹車掣爪1 4 0是被安裝在一 對樞轉臂1 4 1上面。這兩個樞轉臂1 4 1能夠有相同或 57 本紙張又度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210 x 297公釐） \/--------訂---------線 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫表頁) A7 45 8862 _— _ B7 _ 五、發明說明（jrp 不同的長度，並且能夠被安裝到一個樞轉台（圖中未顯示 出來）上，而該樞轉台可以是在鋸片周緣的外部或內部的 位置上。帶有狹長接觸面之掣爪的一個優點是由掣爪所施 加的作用力是被分配到鋸片的一個很大的部份上，藉此， 可以讓該鋸片能夠被更快速地阻擋下來。較長的接觸表面 也能夠被用來減少對鋸片造損壞的機會，因爲刹車作用力 被分配到更多的鋸齒上面。 雖然，上述這些範例型之具體實施例都是以單獨一個 與鋸片之鋸齒相嚙合的剎車掣爪來作說明，然而，該刹車 系統也可以包括有兩個與鋸片周緣兩個或更多部位相嚙合 的掣爪，以降低鋸片的停止時間或擴展阻擋作用力。本發 明也可以使用接觸鋸片兩側之相反位置之掣爪。圖1 4說 明使用兩個掣爪夾固住鋸片相反側的一個範例型之具體實 施例。如圖所示，刹車掣爪1 4 0係可樞轉自如地安裝在 鋸片6 4的兩側。每一個掣爪包括有一個靠近鋸片的接觸 頭1 7 0、和一個與接觸頭1 7 0相反方向的槓桿臂1 7 2。這兩個掣爪是可樞轉自如地安裝在插銷1 7 4上，該 插銷1 7 4則穿過位於掣爪上的接觸頭1 7 0和槓桿臂1 7 2之間的樞轉孔。因而，當每一個掣爪的槓桿臂1 7 2 向上旋轉的時候（如圖14所示），兩個接觸頭17 0相 互靠近在一起。這些掣爪是安裝在相對於鋸片的位置上， 使得接觸頭1 7 0沿著鋸片的移動行程方向朝向鋸片旋轉 。一旦這些掣爪接觸並抓握住該鋸片的時候，它們被鋸片 的下移運動向下拉扯而繼續地朝內樞轉。結果，該鋸片被 58 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（2】0 X 297公釐） " — — — — fi— — — — — — — ^ --------—訂.-----II— (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印制-^ 458802 A7 B7 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作杜印制^ 五、發明說明（κί) iy 夾擰在這些掣爪的接觸面之間愈來愈緊，直到這些掣爪不 再能夠更進一步地靠攏爲止，在這個時候，鋸片被夾持在 這些掣爪之間而停止下來。 爲了確保兩個掣爪貼合在鋸片上而靠在一起，設有一 個連桿1 7 6，該連桿1 7 6的兩端是連接到槓桿臂1 7 2。連桿1 7 6的中央部份延伸超過該鋸片而停靠在刹車 彈簧1 3 0的端部。如上述之討論，該刹車彈簧1 3 ◦是 由可熔斷構件1 2 2將其彎曲地固定住，而可熔斷構件1 2 2是連接在接觸線柱1 3 6上。雨掣爪接觸頭與鋸片之 間的間隔是藉由調整該彈簧的位置來控制的。當該可熔斷 構件1 2 2被熔化的時候，該彈簧即驅動連桿1 7 6向上 移動。假如’首先只有一個掣爪接觸到銷片，連桿向上移 動的動作被傳遞到另一個掣爪上，直到另一個掣爪也碰觸 到鋸片爲止。 從本說明中將可明白：上述的雙掣爪系統可以在不超 過本發明之範圍以內對它的實際執行作許多變化。譬如， 該連桿可以被前述之致動機構其中的任何一種向上驅動， 這些致動機構包括：爆炸裝藥、電磁閥、壓縮空氣等等。 作爲另一個具體實施例的說明’ 一個或一個以上的掣爪可 以被設置在只接觸館片一側的位置。另外地，該連桿也可 以被省略’並且每一個掣爪由一個獨立的彈簧、爆炸裝藥 、電磁閥等等來作動。 爲了增加掣爪在鋸片上的抓握動作，掣爪的接觸面可 以披覆一餍相對高摩擦係數的物質，像是橡膠等。另一方 59 本紙張尺度適用+國國家標準（CNS)A^規格（210 X 297公釐） 厂--------訂---------線 (請先閱讀背靣之注意事項再填寫本頁) 4 5 8 8 6,； A7 B7 五、發明說明（|/j) 式是’這些掣爪可以由一個比鋸片更爲堅硬的材料製成， 並且讓掣爪具有一個帶有脊條之表面，以便能夠如圖所示 .一般地咬入到鋸片裏。又一方式是，或額外的方法是，該 鋸片在架構形狀上可以被設置有一個抓握結構，像是高摩 擦係數之材料被覆層、溝槽、凹痕、孔洞、凸出物等等， 以便更進一步地加強掣爪的抓握動作。 如同先前所提及的，經常希望能夠將掣爪的位置放置 在較爲靠近鋸片的地方，以減少把掣爪移動到與鋸片相接 觸的狀態所需要的時間。雖然，掣爪與鋸片之間的最佳間 隔距離可能會隨著特定的切削工具、偵測系統、以及/或 是刹車系統之架構形狀而改變，但已經發現在掣爪和鋸片 之間大約1/3 2英吋至1/4英吋的空間距離在上述之 彈簧作動之具體實施例裏能夠提供適當的效果。然而，如 同在此一技術領域中早已爲人所熟知的，像是鋸片等的切 削工具並沒有完全一致的尺寸。譬如，對於具有1 〇英时 公稱直徑和0. 12 5英吋公稱厚度的圓鋸之鋸片，來自 不同製造廠或作爲不同用途之實際鋸片可能具有範#介於 9. 5英吋到10. 5英吋之間的直徑，以及範圍介於〇N 0 7 5英吋至0· 15英吋之間的厚度。因而，爲了確保 一致的刹車速度’每逢更換鋸片的時候，需要調整擊爪的 位置。 、 剎車系統3 4可以選擇地採用自動機構和/或自行§周 整的機構，以確保在掣爪和切削工具之間的間隔距離是^ 一個可接受的範圍以內。從本說明中可以瞭解：有許多= 60 Γ靖先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 訂： -線· 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 本紙張尺度適用_國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210 X 297公釐） 458862 A7 B7 五、發明說明（^/) 構可用來自動地判定掣爪的空間間隔，這些機構包括電氣 、機械 '光學等等。舉例說明：圖1 5顯示一個掣爪1 8 〇具有一個用來偵測正確的掣爪間隔的電容系統。類似圖 2所示的剎車掣爪1 4 0，該掣爪1 8 0可以設有一個斜 面部1 8 2 ’該斜面部是呈傾斜或其它形狀以便能夠快速 且完全地嚙合切削工具的齒部。另外，掣爪1 8 0包括有 一對大體上爲平行且分隔開的平行臂1 8 4，平行臂1 8 4延伸超過斜面部1 8 2。該平行臂1 8 4係設置且延伸 於鋸片的兩側’而當掣爪被置於貼著在鋸片的位置的時候 ’平行臂1 8 4沒有觸及該銷片。每一個平行臂1 8 4設 有一個電容器板1 8 6，電容器板的位置在平行臂鄰近鋸 片的內側面上。導電引線1 8 8從每一個電容器板1 8 6 延伸到適當的鋸片偵測器電路（圖中未顯示出來）。 電容器板1 8 6係位於平行臂1 8 4上面，以致於， 當掣爪的間隔在一個想要有的範圍以內的時候，鋸片會延 伸在兩個電容器板1 8 6之間。從本說明中可明白：跨越 在兩電容器板1 8 6之間的電容量將會隨著是否鋸片係位 於電容器板之間而有變化。鋸片偵測電路被設計成能驅動 一個電氣信號通過導電引線1 8 8，並且偵測出跨越兩電 容器板之間電容量的變化。可用來配合掣爪1 8 0使用的 適當電路已早爲熟悉本技術領域之人士所習知，這些適當 電路可以包括有類似先前所描述之第一電氣系統3 8和第 二電氣系統8 8之系統。這些電容器板能夠被選擇採用一 種架構，該架構能夠偵測出掣爪是過於靠近或是不夠靠近 61 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本買) 訂· --線 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（21〇 X 297公釐〉 4 5 88 6 2 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印制农 A7 B7 c 五、發明說明) 鋸片。另一替代的方式是’兩對電容器板可以被設置在掣 爪上面；其中一對電容器板用來偵測是否掣爪太過靠近鋸 片，而另一對電容器板則偵測掣爪是否太過遠離鋸片。在 所有情況之下，偵測器電路係被設計成在不能測出正確的 掣爪間隔的時候，能夠產生錯誤信號並且/或是令機器暫 停。 雖然以上已經說明一個範例型之自動掣爪間隔偵測系 統，但是從本說明之中可以理解到：在本發明的範圍以內 可以有許多改變或修飾。譬如，兩個電容器板可以被放置 在鋸片的同一側，而不是在相反側。這些電容器板和/或 鋸片偵測電路可以獨立設置在掣爪的外部，與掣爪分離開 來。在後一情形之中，譬如，這些電容器板和偵測電路可 以安裝在一個單獨的電子線路板上面，而將該電子線路板 固定到該掣爪上。另一替代的方式是，這些電容器板可以 用一個或多個發光二極體和偵測器來取代，以致於，當掣 爪被適當地安置好的時候，鋸片會阻礙到二極體和偵測器 之間的光束路徑。其它用來偵測鋸片接近掣爪的方法也是 可能的。以下可作爲更進一步的選擇方案：電容器板1 8 6、1 8 8的功能可以用作爲充電板6 2、6 6，而替代 掣爪間隔偵測器或是在掣爪間隔偵測器之外另加上電容器 板。另外，一個偵測板可以被安裝在掣爪的斜面1 8 2上 面。這塊偵測板可用來偵測被用作爲接觸偵測之驅動輸入 信號。在偵測板上被測出的信號之大小將是與偵測板和鋸 片之鋸齒之間的間隔成反比。假如這信號的大小不超過一 62 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210 X 297公釐} (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) ΐ-Β · -線· ? A7 B7 五、發明說明) 個已知的限定値，該系統將會判定這種情形是表示掣爪面 沒有接近鋸片到足夠的程度。 . 因爲對於許多的切削機器而言，鋸片的高度和/或角 度是可以調整的，所以會想要將該掣爪安裝在機器框架上 的一個會隨著鋸片移動的部位上。這樣的安排將會保證掣 爪被維持在相對於該鋸片的一個預定位置上。相似地，充 電板是較佳地被裝設在可隨著鋸片或樞轉軸移動的地方， 以便於保持與它們之間有一個預定的固定間隔。以上已經 說明一個範例型之具體實施例，在這個具體實施例裏，充 電扳是被裝設成能夠與樞轉軸一起移動。 另一個替代方式是，一個固定掣爪可以在架構上被設 計成能夠在任何方位上嚙接鋸片。此類固定掣爪的一個範 例型之具體實施例是說明於圖1 6和圖1 7裏。在這個範 例型之具體實施例裏，剎車系統3 4包括有一個狹長掣爪 2 0 0。該狹長掣爪2 0 0的大小和形狀是設計成沿著鋸 片6 4的外周緣延伸，就如同它是沿著垂直方向調整的。 相似地，狹長掣爪2 0 0的寬度是被設計成延伸鋸片6 4 的傾斜寬度。如圖1 6和圖1 7所示，狹長掣爪2 0 0是 安裝在大體平行於鋸片的垂直行程，並且大體上與鋸片的 傾斜軸線呈垂直。結果，不論鋸片的位置和方位如何’該 鋸片和接觸表面2 0 2之間的間隔空間保持不變。 狹長掣爪2 0 0的上端是藉由樞轉銷2 0 6可樞轉自 如地附著到樞轉臂2 0 4上面’該樞轉銷2 0 6穿過樞轉 臂2 0 4的一端，進入到掣爪的側邊。樞轉臂2 0 4的其 63 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 訂，' -丨線· 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210 X 297公釐） A7 4-5 88 6 2 ------B7_ 五、發明說明（“） 它端部是藉由樞轉銷210可樞轉自如地附著到一個或多 個安裝座（圖中未顯示出來）上。狹長掣爪2 0 0的下端 被樞轉銷2 0 5可樞轉自如地附著到下樞轉臂2 0 3，該 樞轉銷2 0 5穿過下樞轉臂2 0 3的一端進入到掣爪的側 邊。下樞轉臂2 0 3是利用樞轉銷2 0 9可樞轉自如地連 接到安裝座（圖中未顯示出來）上。彈簧2 1 2是附著到 下樞轉臂2 0 3靠近樞轉銷2 0 9的一側，而與樞轉銷2 0 5是在相反側。因此，狹長掣爪2 0 0在架構上是被設 計成朝向鋸片6 4或遠離鋸片6 4的方向旋轉。 樞轉臂2 0 4和樞轉銷2 0 9的尺寸大小和位置是被 設計成使狹長掣爪2 0 0不能夠向上樞轉通過該鋸片而不 撞擊到該鋸片的邊緣。當該掣爪在鋸片正在旋轉的時候撞 擊到鋸片，鋸片的移動會引起掣爪繼續向上樞轉直到該掣 爪被牢固地楔緊在鋸片和樞轉臂之間，藉此，而令鋸片停 止下來。掣爪的接觸表面可以被加上咬花紋理、披覆層等 ，以加強掣爪和鋸片之間的握持作用力。 狹長掣爪2 0 0受到彈簧2 1 2的作用被向上偏壓而 樞轉向鋸片，該彈簧2 1 2譬如是被固定到鋸子的框架上 。因此，當掣爪自由地樞轉的時候，彈簧2 1 2驅動該掣 爪快速地朝向鋸片移動。類似於上述之範例型的具體實施 例，可熔斷構件1 2 2是被連接到掣爪上，以便將它保持 在離開鋸片的地方。該可熔斷構件1 2 2在尺寸大小上是 被設計成能夠將掣爪保持在稍微離開_片側緣的位置上。 然而，當充分的電流通過該可熔斷構件1 2 2的時候，該 64 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210 X 297公釐） ------訂---------線 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作杜印製 45 8B 6 2 A7 ____§7__ _ _ 五、發明說明（(ΛΟ 可熔斷構件1 2 2將會熔解’引起掣爪在弹簧2 1 2的偏 壓作用力的影響下朝向鋸片樞轉。 將可由本說明裏瞭解到：在不偏離本發明的範圍以內 ，可對圖16和圖17所示的範例型之具體實施例作許多 改變。譬如’該掣爪可以在架構形狀上被設計成只在重力 的影響下朝向鋸片的方向樞轉。另個替代的方式是：彈 簧2 1 2可以是一壓縮彈簧，該壓縮彈簧正常情彤之下是 將掣爪固定在離開鋸片的位置，直到它在另一彈簧、爆炸 裝藥、電磁閥、氣體壓力等等的作用力影饗下被朝向上方 旋轉爲止。更進而，該掣爪可以被安裝在鋸片的另一側， 以便在彈簧、爆炸塡藥' 電磁閥、氣體壓力等等之作用力 影響之下，向下樞轉到鋸片裏。 如同先前的描述’本發明提供一個可靠的系統，在此 處’我們稱該系統爲安全止動機構3 〇。該安全止動機構 3 0係用來當機器的切削工具接觸到使用者的身體的時候 ，可令該切削工具停止。雖然，已經在附圖中顯示並且在 先前的說明中也解釋過安全止動機構3 0的許多範例型具 體實施例，但可以從本說明中暸解：該安全止動機構的特 定實施方式可以依照該機構所安裝的特定切削工具而有所 改變。爲了對本發明之安全止動機構3 0的彈性和多功能 性提供另外的說明’現在將藉由許多常見的機器，對本發 明的安全止動機構的範例型具體實施例進行簡短地解釋。 圖1 8係顯示一個桌鋸裏使用的安全止動機構3 0。 該桌鋸的鋸片6 4是被裝設在心軸7 0上面。心軸7 0從 65 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210x 297公釐） --------------訂---------線 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填窝本頁) 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作杜印製 45886/ A7 -----B7_____ 五、發明說明（^巧） —個擺動臂2 2 〇向外延伸（從圖18的方向觀察），該 擺動臂2 2 0係圍繞著一個軸桿2 2 2樞轉，以上升和下 降館片。一個蝸輪2 2 4嚙合一個設置在擺動臂上面的弧 形齒條’以便將該擺動臂2 2 0圍繞著軸桿樞轉。安全止 動機構3 0包括有一個依附在擺動臂2 2 〇上的托架2 2 8 ’譬如藉由一個或多個延伸通過該托架2 2 8的螺栓2 3 0將該托架2 2 8固定在擺動臂2 2 0上面。設置在安 裝托架2 2 8上的是充電板6 2和6 6。這些充電板是擺 置在平行於館片6 4的地方，並且與鋸片6 4稍微分隔開 ’以便在這些充電板之間產生電容分路。這些安裝托架可 以由電氣絕緣材料製成，或是將電氣絕緣體置於托架和充 電板之間。 安裝托架2 2 8從擺動臂2 2 0的端部延伸超過鋸片 6 4的側緣。一個刹車掣爪1 4 0可樞轉自如地被安裝在 —個從該托架延伸出來的帶肩螺栓1 4 2上面。該掣爪的 自由端被一根壓縮彈簧2 3 6偏壓向鋸片的側緣。彈簧是 在壓縮狀態被固定在該掣爪和一個彈簧座2 3 8之間，該 彈簧座2 3 8從托架處延伸出來。一個可熔斷構件1 2 2 被固定到一對接觸線柱2 4 0之間。該可熔斷構件1 2 2 係附著到掣爪上，並且抵住彈簧的偏壓作用而將該掣爪保 持在離開鋸片側緣的位置。 —個電子裝置單元2 4 2包括有一個像是上述之第一 電氣系統3 8和第二電氣系統8 8的接觸偵測器。帶有屏 蔽作用之電續線6 0和9 0從該電子裝置單元處分別延伸 66 --------訂---------線--> I (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210 X 297公釐） 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 4 5 88 f Α7 -------—— 阳 五、發明說明（石+ ) 到板6 2和6 6。電子裝置單元2 4 2也包括有一個 ^是則述之點火系統i丄5的電流產生器，該電流產生器 =連接到接觸線柱2 4 G…條電源電續線2 4 4從電子 衣置單元2 4 2處延伸到一個適當的電源（圖中未顯示出 來）。當該接觸偵測器偵測出使用者身體和鋸片之間的接 觸的時候，該點火線路熔化該可熔斷構件丄2 2，藉此， 釋放出該擊爪’該掣爪嚙合鋸片’令鋸片突然地停止下來 ΰ 應可注息到：藉由將掣爪和充電板設置在附著於擺動 臂上的托架2 2 8上面，當鋸片被調整的時候，掣爪和充 電板將隨著鋸片-起移動。這能夠消除掉每次移動鋸片的 時候需要重新擺放掣爪和/或充電板的需要。更進而，匱 1 8所示的安全止動機構3 〇具體實施例是適合於容易安 1或疋便於改裝現有未設置安全止動機構的桌鋸^改裝現 有桌鋸唯一需要做的事是：在該擺動臂的端部鑽攻一個或 多個螺絲孔，以容納螺检2 3 Q。托架2 2 §的正確定位 能夠視需要調整’譬如，向下延伸，以便安裝在特殊的鋸 床殻體內部。 雖然’已經藉由一個桌鋸來說明安全止動機構3 〇的 一個特殊貫施方式，但將可從本說明中瞭解到：上述之任 何實施方法和變化也可以被應用在桌鋸系統裏。此外，雖 然是藉由一個特殊的桌鋸架構來說明安全止動機構3 0， 但可從本說明中瞭解到：該安全止動機構也可以被使用在 任何採用本發明之各種實施例和實施方法的桌鋸架構裏。 67 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210 X 297公釐） rv--------訂----------線 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 4 5 Β8 Γ 五、發明說明（α) 譬如’如圖1 8所示，擺動臂在架構上是被設計成圍繞著 一根靠近桌鋸正面的軸桿樞轉。結果，當掣爪嚙揆錯片而 鋸片的角動量被傳送到該擺動臂的時候，依擺動臂的重量 和蝸輪2 2 4裏的游隙而定，該擺動臂可能傾向朝上升起 。假如，該擺動臂向上升起，鋸片也將上升，可能會加重 對使用者的傷害。角動量的這項移轉對於掣爪是安裝在鋸 床的框架上的場合是不可能會成爲一個問題的。然而’在 掣爪是安裝在擺動臂的場合，可能會想要將擺動臂的樞轉 中心設置在桌鋸的後方。這種架構能夠利用反轉鋸片旋轉 方向並且移動剎車到擺動臂上而可從圖1 8中觀察到。鋸 床的前方將是在圖18裏的左側。在這種架構裏面，鋸片 的角動量在被掣爪傳遞到擺動臂的時候將傾向於推動鋸片 向下，而不是將鋸片向上推動。另外地，蝸輪可以利用一 根彈簧將其固定在位置上，以容許蝸輪移動，以便讓擺動 臂在鋸片被擋住的時候向下偏轉。 另外，在塑膠襯套如先前的說明般被放置在鋸片和心 軸之間的場合，由阻擋鋸片所產生的實質作用力幾乎立刻 會引起襯套發生變形。一般而言，當鋸片試圖圍繞著掣爪 旋轉的時候，鋸片安裝孔的邊緣將會咬入襯套。因此，假 如，掣爪是被安裝在鋸片的背後（如圖18所示）’然後 ，當掣爪啣接鋸片的時候，該鋸片將傾向於向下移動進入 到襯套裏，並離開使用者。由於這種效應，因此，假如樞 轉軸銷如上所述被移到鋸子背後的時候’―般多希望將掣 爪安裝在擺動臂上面。 68 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 訂- ;線_ 經濱部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標率（CNS)A4規格（210 X 297公釐） 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 '45BBB2 A7 ____B7___ 五、發明說明（lL ) / 如上述的討論，在安全止動機構3 0的一些實施方法 之中，在安全止動機構3 0被觸發而將切削工具停住之後 ，可能需要更換部份的安全止動機構3 0 (譬如：剎車掣 爪1 4 0、可熔斷構件1 2 2等等）。因此，在本發明的 另一個替代性之具體實施例裏，一部份或全部的安全止動 機構3 0被設置在一個能夠很容易地被更換的掣動盒或掣 動模組裏面。圖1 9以上述之圖1 8的桌鋸爲例顯示一個 盒式安全止動機構的例子。掣動盒2 4 6 —般包括一個框 架或殼體2 4 8，該殼體2 4 8係可附著到一個靠近錯片 6 4的支撐物表面像是安裝托架2 2 8上面。掣動盒2 4 6可以利用任何適當的機構，包括螺栓2 5 0，將它固定 到支撐物表面上。另一個替代的方式或是另加的方式是， 該擊動盒可以在架構上被設計成能夠被裝配在安裝托架上 的一個插座或其它適當的容器裏。較佳的是，該掣動盒具 有一個不對稱的形狀，以致於它只能夠在正確的方位上被 固定到支撐物表面上。在圖1 9的範例型之具體實施例裏 ，該安裝托架包括有一個肩形凸出物2 5 2，該肩形凸出 物2 5 2對應於殼體2 4 8裏的一個斜面2 5 4，以便除 非斜面對齊該肩形凸出物，否則無法將掣動盒裝入。可從 本說明中理解到：在本發明的範圍以內，有許多其它的方 法可以保證掣動盒達到正確的方位。 掣動盒2 4 6也包括有一個電氣連接器2 5 6，該電 氣連接器2 5 6在架構上被設計成可以操作自如地嚼合一 個附著於電纜線2 6 〇的栓塞2 5 8。該電纜線包括有用 69 --------訂---------線 (諳先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210 X 297公釐） 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 458862 A7 ______B7__ 五、發明說明（//]) 於供輸電力到該電子裝置單元的導體，以及帶有屏蔽作用 之電纜線6 0和9 0和其它的輸入信號線。該電纜線也可 以傳導來自於電子裝置單元的輸出信號，像是關閉信號等 ，以停止馬達組合件1 2。雖然，栓塞2 5 8和電纜線2 6〇在圖中是顯示爲可以自由地移動，將可從本說明中暸 解：栓塞2 5 8可以被牢固地安裝在支撐物表面。更進一 步地說，栓塞2 5 8可以被牢固地擺放在能夠在將連接器 嚙合栓塞的時候確保掣動盒適當地對齊且有正確方位的位 置上。作爲更進一步的安全措施--該措施將在以下作進 一步的討論，電子裝置單元可以在架構上被設計成能夠提 供一個啓動信號給鋸子的動力源，因而，可以防止鋸子在 未適當完成安裝掣動盒的情況下被使用。 殻體2 4 8包括有一個開孔2 6 2，當掣爪被釋放開 的時候，該掣爪可以穿過該開孔2 6 2突出到外面。另一 替代的方式是，掣爪能夠被製作成在被使用前是與殼體2 4 8表面齊平。在任何情況之下，該掣爪是藉由帶肩螺栓 1 4 2可樞轉自如地連接到殼體2 4 8，以便一旦偵測到 使用者的身體與鋸片相接觸的時候，讓該掣爪移向鋸片， 並與鋸片相嚙合。帶肩螺栓1 4 2可以安裝在殼體2 4 8 上，或是可被安裝支撐物表面而延伸穿過殼體和掣爪上面 的開孔。以金屬箔2 2 9等材料覆蓋在掣爪和開口上以防 止污染或掣爪意外地突伸的方式也是有用的。 一般而言，掣動盒2 4 6在架構上是被設計成可以讓 掣爪與鋸片之間的間隔能夠依照實際的需要作調整。例如 70 Γ—'--------訂---------線-----_ (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210 X 297公釐） 45 BSS2 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 B7 五、發明說明（U ) ，可以利用譬如是在一個或多個安裝螺栓上樞轉或滑動該 掣動盒的方式進行調整掣動盒2 4 6相對於鋸片的位置。 在這種情形之中，若是需要的話’掣爪對鋸片之間隔可以 間接地利用量取掣爪對掣動盒之間的間隔來判定。另一替 代的方式是，該掣動盒可以是固定的’而可以在該撃動盒 內部進行調整掣爪。爲了作爲進一步的替代方式，可以將 掣動盒和掣爪都設計成可調整的。類似地，安裝托架相對 於鋸片的位置也可以是可調整的。 在這個範例型之具體實施例裏，掣動盒2 4 6容納有 大部份的安全止動機構3 0，這安全止動機構3 0包括有 掣爪、彈簧、可熔斷構件、接觸線柱、接地線柱、和電子 裝置單元。另外地，充電板6 2和6 4也可以是被容納在 該掣動盒內部。將大部份的安全止動機構3 0放置在掣動 盒內部的作法可以讓製造商開發出改良的電子裝置和額外 的功能等，而無需對該機器作重大的改型。另一替代的方 式是，只有部份的安全止動機構3 0被放置在掣動盒內部 ’像是掣爪、彈簧、和可熔斷構件等。這種替代方案的優 點之一是：它將減少掣動盒的成本。作爲更進一步的替代 方案，該安全止動機構3 0可以包括有複數個掣動盒。譬 如’一個掣動盒2 4 6可以包括掣爪、彈簧、可熔斷構件 和接觸線柱與接地線柱，然而’另一個掣動盒可以包括電 子裝置單元❶ 該掣動盒2 4 6可選擇地採用不同的尺寸大小或架構 ，以適應不同大小的鋸片。例如，圖1 9裏所示的一個較 71 、紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210 X 297公釐） -------------./λ--------訂---------線 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 4 5 88 6 A7 __________B7_______ 五、發明說明（^ ) 長的掣動盒可以被使用於不同直徑的鋸片。更進一步地說 ，可以針對不同的用途與不同類別的鋸片（例如：膠合板 的截鋸機、载邊鋸等）設置不同的掣動盒。譬如’ 一個設 有第一類掣爪的第一掣動盒可以被使用在第一類型之鋸片 ’然而，一個設有第二類不同掣爪之掣動盒可以被用在— 個第二不同的鋸片上。另一個替代的方式是，一個掣動盒 的電子裝置可以是不同於另一個掣動盒的電子裝置’以便 適用於不同的用途（譬如，切削塑膠而不是木料）。另外 ，同時使用複數個掣動盒以確保該安全止動機構能夠對每 一種材料有最適當的反應，這也是包括在本發明的範圍以 內。 現在轉到圖20和圖21，在這些圖中顯示一個範例 型之斜切鋸2 7 0 (也被稱之爲斬鋸）的安全止動機構3 0。將可從本說明中瞭解：該斜切鋸2 7 0可以是任意類 型的斜切鋸，包括簡單型之斜切鋸、複合型斜切鋸、滑動 複合型斜切鋸、等等。一般而言，斜切鋸2 7 0包括有一 個底座或固定架2 7 2，該底座2 7 2適於用來固定一個 待切割的工件。一個擺動臂2 7 4被可樞轉自如地連接到 底座2 7 2上，以便讓該擺動臂2 7 4能夠向下樞轉向底 座2 7 2。附著在該擺動臂2 7 4上面的是一個殼體2 7 6，該殼體2 7 6係可適於用來至少部份地圍封住一個圓 形鋸片6 4。一個馬達組合件1 2被連接到該殻體2 7 6 上，並且該馬達組合件1 2包括有一個旋轉心軸7 0，鋸 片係安裝在該心軸7 0上面。馬達組合件1 2包括有一個 72 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS>A4規格（210 X 297公釐） I I I I · -Λ ------- - - I rv. (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 45ΒΒΒ2 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 Α7 Β7 五、發明說明（"Jg) 帶有觸發器2 8 0的握把2 7 8，使得能夠操作自如地運 轉該鋸子器。鋸片6 4向下方旋轉朝向該擺動臂2 7 4。 一個選配用的鋸片防護板（圖中未顯示出來）可以自殼體 2 7 6的底部延伸出來以覆蓋住自殼體中曝露出來的鋸片 之任何部份。 上述安全止動機構3 0之種種架構和設計的任何一種 都可以被使用在斜切鋸2 7 0裏。在圖2 0和圖2 1所顯 示的範例型之具體實施例裏，安全止動機構3 0是一個盒 式系統。除了充電板6 2和6 6爲例外之外，剎車系統3 4和接觸檢測系統3 2兩者都是包括在掣動盒2 4 6裏面 。該掣動盒2 4 6在架構上被設計成是利用一個或多個螺 栓2 5 0將該掣動盒2 4 6安裝在殼體2 7 6的前側內表 面上。該殻體可以包括一個活動鑲板或活動門2 7 7，以 便讓人員可以接近該掣動盒。一個剎車掣爪1 4 〇是被安 裝在擊動盒內部’並且可被置於鋸片前面。充電板6 2和 6 6是藉由一個或多個安裝座2 8 2被連接到殼體2 7 6 的內壁’這些安裝座2 8 2係藉由任何適當的機構像是螺 检2 8 4等附著在殼體上，並且在架構上係被設計成能使 充電板平行並且緊密鄰接鋸片6 4。如圖2 1所示，在充 電板和鋸片之間的間隔是較佳地明顯少於充電板和殻體之 間的間隔’以便使在充電板和殼體之間的任何寄生電容量 減少到最小的程度。另一個替代的方式是，該殼體可以由 電氣絕緣材料製成。 帶有屏蔽作用之電纜線6 0和9 0連接這些充電板到 73 +飒又週币r ®國豕標準（CNS)A4規格（21〇 χ 297公釐 二--------訂---------線--r (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本I) A7 4 5 88 8 2 __B7 五、發明說明（q 1) 掣動盒。安全止動機構3 0的電源是由一條自馬達組合件 1 2延伸出來的電纜線供給的。除了將掣爪嚙合鋸片以外 ，在掣動盒2 4 6內部的電子裝置單元也在架構上被設計 成當使用者和鋸片之間的接觸被偵知的時候，能夠將通往 馬達組合件12的電源中斷。 如同上述關於桌鋸的討論，一個以每分鐘數千轉的速 度旋轉的圓形鋸片擁有一個相當數量的角動量。因此，當 掣爪嚙合一個圓形鋸片像是前述在斜切鋸2 7 0所發現的 一般並在數毫秒內將鋸片停止下來的時候，角動量必須被 傳遞到刹車裏。因爲斜切鋸的擺動臂是自由地沿著鋸片旋 轉的方向樞轉，當鋸片被突然地停住的時候，該鋸片的角 動量可以被傳送到擺動臂裏，引起該擺動臂向下擺動。擺 動臂的這種突然而有力的向下移動之動作若是使用者的身 體有一部份在鋸片的下方的時候，可能造成對使用者的傷 害。因此，斜切鋸的安全止動機構3 0之一個替代的具體 實施例也包括有用於防止當鋸片被停住的時候該擺動臂向 下移動的機構。另外’掣爪一般是被安裝在斜切鋸的前面 ，以便在鋸片與掣爪相嚙合的時候，驅策該鋸片向上爬升 離開使用者（也就是：使塑膠襯套變形）。 將可由本說明中瞭解：有許多適當的機構，可用來防 止擺動臂突然向下的移動動作。例如，在擺動臂和斜切鋸 之底座之間的樞轉連接可以由電氣機構來扣鎖。譬如是， 使用一種電磁鐵之板狀彈簧，以防止擺動臂樞轉。這個用 來扣鎖住該接合處之信號可以由該偵測系統來提供。另一 74 本紙張尺度遶用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210 X 297公楚） • · 』 一 二--------訂---------線--Γ.ί {請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 A7 A7 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 _____B7__ 五、發明說明（ji) 替代之方式是，在該擺動臂和底座之間可以連接以一個減 振器，以便限制在偵測得知鋸片和使用者接觸的時刻和鋸 片受到掣爪阻止而停下來的時刻在這個兩個時刻期間鋸片 能夠移動多遠的距離。雖然，有許多其它的方法連接該擺 動臂到底座以防止擺動臂向底座方向的突然移動，此類設 計大多數將角動量轉移到擺動臂/底座組合件。視鋸切機 的重量和平衡而定，該角動量可能是足以引起整個鋸切機 傾倒。因此，有需要將該底座以固定夾、螺栓等將它固定 到一個穩固的表面上。 另一個替代方式是：斜切鋸在架構上被設計成能夠吸 收任何角動量而不讓擺動臂向下移動。例如，圖2 〇和圖 21所示的範例型之具體實施例在架構上具有一個樞轉馬 達組合件，以容許鋸片在一旦與掣爪相嚙合後向上移動進 入到殼體裏。馬達組合件1 2是經由樞轉螺栓2 8 6被連 接到殼體2 7 6，可容許該馬達組合件1 2沿著鋸片旋轉 方向圍繞著螺栓2 8 6樞轉。一個彈簧2 9 2是被壓縮在 殻體和固定座2 9 4之間以便逆向著鋸片旋轉方向施加偏 壓作用力到該馬達組合件。該馬達組合件1 2也包括有一 個凸出部2 9 6，該凸出部2 9 6滑抵著殼體上的凸緣2 9 8以便將馬達組合件1 2的端部保持在抵靠著殼體上的 樞轉螺栓的位置。 當鋸切機在使用時，彈簧2 9 2將馬達組合件旋轉保 持在一個完全逆向於鋸片旋轉方向的正常位置上。然而， 一旦該掣爪被釋放開以嚙合鋸片的時候，該馬達組合件和 75 本纸張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210 X 297公釐） \J.. -------------.k--------訂--------- (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 A7 r — _ B7 五、發明說明n) 鋸片即逆向於彈簧的偏壓方向而向上樞轉。在這個具體實 施例裏，掣爪被置於鋸片的前方，以致於樞轉螺栓2 8 6 是介於掣爪和心軸之間。這樣的安排促使鋸片當被阻擋的 時候，向上移動進入到殼體內部。彈簧是經選擇具有足夠 的強度以便在切穿一工件的時候將馬達組合件1 2保持在 下方位置，但它又有足夠的可壓縮性，以容許當鋸片被阻 擋的時候，館片和馬達組合件能夠向上移動。 雖然，以上已經藉由一個斜切鋸作例子說明一個安全 止動機構3 0的範例型實施方法，然而，本發明不應被視 爲局限於任何一個特定的實施方法，因爲安全止動機構3 0的架構和設計明顯地可以依照鋸切機的種類和用途而變 化。例如，對於樞轉馬達組合件架構也可以被結合到上述 的一個或多個其它防止擺動臂突然朝向底座樞轉的系統內 。更進一步地’將可從本說明中明白：鋸片和馬達組合件 可以在架構上以種種方法設計成至少部份地吸收掉鋸片的 角動量。 圖2 2顯不斜切鋸2 7 0的一個替代架構，該斜切鋸 2 7 0被設計成適於吸收鋸片的角動量。在這個具體實施 例裏，斜切据2 7 0包括兩個擺動臂2 7 5和2 7 4。每 一個擺動臂2 7 5、2 7 4的一端3 0 〇被連接到底座2 7 2，而擺動臂的另一個相反端3 0 2被連接到殻體2 7 6、鋸片6 4，和/或馬達組合件（圖中未顯示出來）。 擺動臂彼此相對的位置可以依照所想要有的擺動臂運動而 作改變。在圖2 2裏，擺動臂2 7 5是被連接到底座2 7 76 用t國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（21〇χ 297公釐） \J·. ---- ^--------訂---------線 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作杜印製 4b 8b 6 2 A7 __B7___^ 五、發明說明 2略低於擺動臂2 7 4。一般來說’馬達組合件是牢固地 附著到擺動臂2 7 5的端部3 0 2，然而’殼體2 7 Θ是 被連接到可圍繞著擺動臂2 7 5的端部3 0 2旋轉。擺動 臂2 7 4的端部3 0 2只連接到殼體。這樣的安排使得馬 達組合件和觸發器的動作與許多傳統的斜切鋸裏的動作相 同。另一替代的方式是’該馬達組合件可以被連接以隨者 殼體圍繞著擺動臂2 7 5的端部3 0 2旋轉。 圖2 2裏顯示的架構會引起殼體和/或馬達組合件在 擺動臂樞轉的時候一同旋轉。明顯地’當擺動臂向上移動 的時候，殼體和/或馬達組合件沿著與鋸片在切削的時候 之旋轉方向作相同方向的旋轉°結果’當掣爪嚙合鋸片並 傳遞鋸片的角動量到殻體和/或馬達組合件的時候’該殼 體和/或馬達組合件傾向於沿著與鋸片相同的方向旋轉。 這引起這些擺動臂向上樞轉，拖曳該鋸片離開工件和使用 者的身體。因此，如同以上的說明’圖2 2裏的斜切鋸架 構是適於吸收鋸片的角動量，並將角動量轉換成作用在擺 動臂上的一個向上作用力。 以上所說明的圖2 2之架構說明了安全止動機構3 0 的一個更進一步的替代性具體實施例。明確地說，該安全 止動機構3 0可以在架構上被設計成當偵測出切削工具的 鋸片碰觸到使用者的身體的時候，安全止動機構除了停止 該鋸片之外也能夠快速地移動切削工具的鋸片離開J吏用者 ，或是不使鋸片停止而是令鋸片快速離開使用者身體。這 種替代性之具體實施例可以使用在此處說明的任何切削工 ΊΊ -V--------訂---------線---- (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210 X 297公釐） A7 458862 B7___ 五、發明說明Γ) 具之中。譬如，圖1 8裏的桌鋸之擺動臂2 2 0可以被設 計成當偵測出接觸發生的時候，它能夠脫離蝸輪2 2 4， 並且向下樞轉以拉動該鋸片到鋸切機的上表面。一個彈簧 (圖中未顯示出來）可以被結合到該擺動臂，以增加它向 下掉落的速度。從本說明中將可瞭解到：相似的實施方式 可以使用在此處所描述之所有銅子裏。在這個斜切鋸的案 例裏，先前所討論的電磁板狀剎車可被用來在碰觸到使用 者的時候阻止擺動臂的移動°另外’該釋放系統可以被使 用來在鋸片和使甩者發生接觸的時候釋放出彈簧以便向上 推動擺動臂。在使用這樣的系統的情形之下，可以無需突 然地停止鋸片以避免傷害。 圖2 3係藉由旋臂鋸3 1 0說明安全止動機構3 0的 一個範例型之實施方法。一般來說1旋臂鋸3 1 0包括有 一個水平底座3 1 2、一個從水平底座3 1 2向上延伸的 垂直支柱3 1 4、和一個從垂直支柱3 1 4延伸出來且與 水平底座3 1 2垂直分隔開的導引臂3 1 6。一個滑座3 1 8係可滑動自如地聯結到導引臂3 1 6的底面。滑座3 1 8的底端被連接到鋸子殼體3 2 0和馬達組合件3 2 2 ，可以讓鋸片6 4被拉動越過該底座而切斷被支撐在底座 上的工件（圖中未顯示出來）。 上述種種安全止動機構3 0的架構和安排其中任何一 種都可以被使用在旋臂鋸3 1 0裏。譬如，安全止動機構 3 0可以被放在可裝設在鋸子殼體3 2 0上鄰近鋸片之掣 動盒2 4 6裏面。充電板6 2和6 6 (圖中未顯示出來） 78 k--------訂---------線 <請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210 X 297公釐） A7 458862 ___B7______ 五、發明說明（7厶） 也可以如前述一般被安裝在殼體裏面或其它適當的位置。 剎車掣爪1 4 0在架構上被設計成能夠在鋸片和使用者身 體發生接觸的時候，嚙合鋸片6 4，並令其停止。雖然， 圖中顯示該掣爪係被安裝在靠近鋸片的後側，但也可以替 代以將掣爪裝設在鋸片的前方或任何其它所希望的位置。 應注意到：如先前的說明，假如該鋸片是以一個可變形襯 套將該鋸片與心軸隔離開，那麼，若該掣爪嚙合住鋸片的 前端，該鋸片將很容易向上移動進入到殼體內。 滑座3 1 8—般是被裝設在導引臂3 1 6上，以防止 托架相對於該導引臂3 1 6樞轉。因此，鋸片角動量的轉 移進入到殼體和導引臂通常不會引起該導引臂在剎車時向 使用者的身體方向移動。然而，當一個接觸被偵測得知的 時候，因爲使用者可能正在朝向他們自身的方向拉動該鋸 子，在安全止動機構3 0即使已經停止該鋸片之後，鋸子 仍然可能繼續地朝向使用者移動。這個繼續移動的動作可 能使得已被停止的鋸片被拖拉橫過使用者的部份身體（譬 如是：使用者的手），而導致更進一步地傷害。因此，希 望能夠得到一種額外的剎車系統，以便在一旦偵知鋸片和 使用者身體發生接觸的時候能夠停止滑座和鋸子沿著導弓丨 臂的移動。這種刹車系統也能夠被使用作爲停止鋸片的另 一個替代裝置，特別是當該刹車系統被設計成被觸動時係 拖拉滑座，使其向後退離開使用者 > 這樣的設計可被用來 取代原有刹車系統。 將可由本說明中瞭解：有許多不同的方法可用來停止 79 —"-'--------訂---------線 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210 x 297公釐） 45 8 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 A7 87 五、發明說明 滑座3 1 8沿著導引臂3 1 6滑動。圖2 3只說明了在本 發明之範圍內許多適當的滑座刹車架構其中的兩個例子。 圖示滑座剎車架構的其中一種包括有一個樞轉掣爪組合件 3 2 4。該樞轉掣爪組合件3 2 4設有一個可樞轉自如地 連接到導引滑座3 1 8的掣爪3 2 8。一個安裝在滑座3 1 8上面的致動器3 3 0在操作上配合安全止動機構3 0 ，且在架構上被設計成能夠嚙合掣爪3 2 8。在正常的操 作情形之中，致動器3 3 0保持該掣爪與導引臂3 1 6分 隔開。然而，一旦發現鋸片和使用者的身體發生接觸的時 候，安全止動機構3 0送出一個致動信號給致動器3 3 0 。被送至致動器的致動信號可以是與啓動點火系統115 之信號相同一個信號，或者也可以是不同的一個信號。無 論在什麼情況之下，在收到該致動信號的時候，該致動器 驅動掣爪3 2 8，使它樞轉進入到導引臂裏，防止該導引 滑座更進一步地沿著導引臂向前移動。該掣爪可以由一個 具有高摩擦性材料像是橡膠等製作成的，或是在其表面上 覆蓋以此類的材料，以及/或者可以在形狀架構上利用輪 齒等結構增加它的刹車作用。 圖2 3所示的另一範例型之刹車架構包括一個可鎖定 捲筒組合件3 3 2。該可鎖定捲筒組合件3 3 2可以被用 來取代楔形機構組合件3 2 4或是在楔形機構組合件3 2 4之外另行添加此一捲筒組合件3 3 2。無論在什麼情況 下，該可鎖定捲筒組合件3 3 2包括有一個安裝在垂直支 柱3 1 4上的彈簧作動捲筒3 3 4。一條繫繩或纜繩3 3 80 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210 x 297公釐) ^--------訂---------線 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) A7 458862 —____B7__ 五、發明說明〇彳） 6的一端被連接到滑座3 1 8上，然而，另一端則被捲繞 在彈簧作動捲筒3 3 4的四周。當使用者拉動館子橫過底 座的時候，該捲筒開展開來’而讓該繫繩3 3 6延伸出去 。該捲筒的彈簧施加的負荷作用力可確保該捲筒可以保持 繋繩3 3 6 —個輕微的張力’並且當使用者將鋸子朝向該 垂直支柱拉回的時候’可以將繋繩3 3 6收回捲繞在捲筒 上面。可鎖定捲筒組合件3 3 2也包括有一個像是掣爪3 3 8的捲筒剎車’該捲筒剎車在操作上係與安全止動機構 3 0連動。因此’當鋸片和使用者的身體接觸被測知的時 候，由安全止動機構3 0送出一個致動信號到該捲筒刹車 ，使得該捲筒被扣鎖固定。一旦該捲筒被固定住，繫繩3 3 6防止館子更進—步向離開垂直支柱3 1 4的方向移動 。在可鎖定捲筒組合件3 3 2之另一個圖中未顯币出來的 替代性實施方法裏’該可鎖定捲筒組合件可以被容置在掣 動盒2 4 6裏面或設置在鄰近掣動盒2 4 6的地方’在這 種情形之下，繫繩3 3 6將會從捲筒處向後被拉向垂直支 柱 3 1 4。 將可由本技術說明中瞭解：有許多不同的替代性方法 、裝置和架構可以被用來停止導引滑座和鋸子沿著導引臂 之運動。這些替代方法的任何一種或多種可以被用來取代 或添加到以上所述及圖2 3所示之剎車架構裏。 圖2 4說明實施在一個手持式圓鋸3 4 0裏的安全止 動機構3 0。一般而言，手持式圓鋸3 4 0包括有〜個殼 體3 4 2，該殼體3 4 2包括有一個馬達組合件（圖中未 81 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210 X 297公釐） V?» ..'.4--------訂---------線 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 ^^8862 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 A7 __B7_________ 五、發明說明（1) 顯示出來）、一個導引板3 4 4、和一個伸縮鋸片防護裝 置3 4 6。鋸片6 4是經由心軸7 0連接到該馬達組合件 上面。安全止動機構30可以依照先前所述之種種具體實 施例和架構之其中任何一種的方法應用在鋸子3 4 〇暴° 在圖2 4.顯示的範例型實施方法裏，該安全止動機構是顯 示爲一個掣動盒型的系統。掣動盒2 4 6包括有一個刹車 掣爪1 4 0，且該掣動盒2 4 6係被連接到殼體3 4 2上 面，以致於掣爪可以嚙合該鋸片。充電板（圖中未顯示岀 來）可以被安裝在殼體的一個鄰近鋸片的內側面或任何其 它適於電容性藕合跨越鋸片之輸入信號的位置。圖示之掣 動盒2 4 6和掣爪是安裝在鄰近鋸片前側以避免干擾到伸 縮鋸片防護裝置3 4 6。另一代替方法是，該掣爪和掣動 盒2 4 6可以被安裝在鄰近鋸片之任何其它部位。 雖然，以上已經藉由桌鋸、斜切鋸、旋臂鋸、和圓鋸 爲例來說明安全止動機構3 0，可由本技術說明中明白： 安全止動機構3 0的類似實施方法也將適用於實際任何使 用旋轉鋸片且該鋸片周緣帶有切割鋸齒之類型的機器。 作爲本發明之多種功用和可適用多重架構的另一個例 子，圖2 5藉由一個帶鋸3 5 0說明另一個安全止動機構 3 0的具體實施例。一般而言，帶鋸3 5 〇包括有一個主 殼體3 5 2，該主殼體內部設置有一對垂直分離的轉輪3 5 4 °每〜個轉輪3 5 4的周緣都被覆著或覆蓋著一層高 摩擦阻力的材料，譬如是橡膠等等。一個相對較薄但連續 的環形据片6 4緊緊地圍繞著這兩個轉輪。工件是以朝向 82 说尺度適用中關家χ视）--- {請先閱tf背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) ij· 線. 經忒部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 4 D 6 2 A7 _ B7 五、發明說明（押） 該鋸片6 4的方向通過兩轉輪3 5 4之間的切割區3 5 5 來完成切割的。一個上鋸條導引組合件3 5 6和一個下据 條導引組合件3 5 8將旋轉的鋸片保持在切割區3 5 5裏 的一個穩定的路徑上。工作被放置在工作檯3 6 0上朝向 鋸片通過切割區，該工作檯3 6 0形成切割區的底部。 鋸片應該與經常是接地的主殼體之間形成電氣上的絕 綠。因此，館條導引組合件3 5 6和3 5 8--這些据條 導引組合件能夠包括有滾珠軸承導引裝置和摩擦襯墊等--在結構上是將鋸片與主殼體之間作電氣上的隔離。另外 ，在轉輪3 5 4上面的高摩擦被覆層將鋸片與轉輪3 5 4 作電氣上的絕緣隔離。另一替代方式是，這些轉輪可以由 非導電材料製成。 充電板6 2和6 6可以依照許多不同的方式來佈置， 將視其用途和主殼體空間上的限制而定。兩個可能的安排 方式是說明於圖2 5之中。在這第一個方式裏，充電板6 2和6 6是緊靠著跨騎在兩轉輪3 5 4其中之一上面的鋸 片設置。充電板可以被製作成弧彤以配合轉輪的周緣，並 且兩充電板與鋸片之間維持一個固定大小的間隔。這種安 排方式具有很容易保持一個固定的鋸片對充電板之間隔的 優點，因爲該鋸片是被維持在一個與轉輪周緣保持固定不 變的路徑裏。充電板可以經由一個不導電的安裝台被連接 到主殼體’以維持與殼體之間的電氣絕緣。 在充電板許多可能的安排之中，另一種方式包括一個 充電板安裝座3 6 2 ’該充電板安裝座3 6 2在架構上係 83 ."--------訂---------線 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 本紙張尺度適用令國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（21〇 χ 297公釐） A7 B7 4-5 88 6 2 五、發明說明（p| ) 沿著位於兩個轉輪3 5 4之間運轉的鋸片延伸。如同從圖 2 6的細部視圖中特別能夠看出，該充電板安裝座包括有 充電板6 2和6 6。在圖示的實施方式裏，該充電板安裝 座具有一個實質爲C形之斷面，其大小可以配合安裝在鋸 片的側邊和後緣（也就是：無錯齒的一側之側緣）。該充 電板安裝座係裝設在主殼體3 5 2上面，並且被譬如是一 個或多個彈簧3 6 4彈性地側向推壓向移動中的鋸片。因 爲据片6 4可能傾向在它的路徑上有稍微的偏轉或旁移， 彈簧3 6 4確保該充電板安裝座能夠隨著鋸片移動。充電 板安裝座3 6 2 —般是由耐用且非導電性之材料像是陶瓷 '塑膠等製成的。充電板6 2和6 6是被設置在充電板安 裝座3 6 2上面或在它的內部。雖然圖示的這些充電板是 被設置在鋸片6 4的相反側邊，這些充電板也可以被取代 選擇設置在鋸片的同一側。充電板安裝座的這種自動對齊 之架構能夠確保儘管鋸片會移動，鋸片對充電板之間隔實 質上係固定的。 安全止動機構3 0可以包括一個具有一個或多個掣爪 (圖中未顯示出來）的剎車系統3 4，這些掣爪在架樽上 係設計成當偵測得知鋸片和使用者身體之間發生接觸的時 候，掣爪可嚙合鋸片並令該鋸片停止。這些掣爪可以被安 排成如同先前的說明一般與鋸片的鋸齒相嚙合或與鋸片的 側邊相嚙合。由於高的摩擦作用力和鋸片高張力壓配在轉 輪上面，使得可能需要在停住鋸片的同時，也停止兩個轉 輪其中之一或兩個皆需停住。因此，替代之方法是，這些 84 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（21〇 X 297公釐） ·' , ------· W--------訂---------線 (锖先閱讀背面之注意事項再填窝本頁> 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 A7 4 b 88 6 2 __B7__ 五、發明說明（(5^) 掣爪可以被設計成嚙合住轉輪3 5 4的其中之一或兩個都 嚙合住。然而，由於一般帶鋸轉輪3 5 4具有相對高的質 量，旋轉的轉輪之角動量可能是相當大的，需要一個大的 作用力以便能夠真正地同時停住該鋸片和轉輪。因而，一 個更進一步的取代性之刹車系統3 4具體實施例是說示在 圖2 7之中。如同以下的說明，該替代性之剎車系統3 4 在架構上被設計成能夠在偵測得知鋸片和使用者身體之間 發生接觸的時候切斷鋸片6 4。藉由切斷鋸片，該鋸片環 繞著轉輪3 5 4上的張力壓配即被釋放開，因而可讓該鋸 片被停住而無需停住這些轉輪。 如同可由圖2 7的細部視圖中更淸楚地看出，該替代 性之刹車系統3 4包括有一個爆炸性纜線或螺栓切斷裝置 3 6 6，該爆炸型纜線切割裝置3 6 6可被置於鄰近鋸片 6 4的地方以便在一收到啓動信號的時候便切斷該鋸片。 適當的纜線切割裝置3 6 6可以自種種供應商處取得，這 些供應商包括紐澤西州Fairfield的Cartr i d g e Actuated Devices, Inc. 公司。纜線切割裝置3 6 6的大小和結構可以視鋸片6 4 的大小和寬度、鋸片的材質、鋸片的速度等因素而改變。 一般而言，纜線切割裝置3 6 6將被設置在緊貼著工作檯 3 6 0的下表面，以阻止鋸片在被切斷以後仍持續向下的 移動。一個類似先前所描述的電子裝置單元2 4 2在操作 上被聯接到纜線切割裝置3 6 6，以便在電子裝置單元一 旦偵知使用者身體和鋸片發生接觸的時候，傳送一個啓動 85 ^--------訂---------線--- (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印制衣 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210 x 297公釐） A7 45 88 6 2 ____^-— 五、發明說明（》>) 信號給該裝置3 6 6。然後，纜線切割裝置3 6 6幾乎瞬 間切斷該鋸片，藉此’釋放掉鋸片環繞轉輪3 5 4之張緊 壓配。一旦切斷之後，即使轉輪3 5 4繼續旋轉，然而， 鋸片實質上停止移動。如同先前的說明’安全止動機構3 0可以在架構上被選擇性地設計成關閉連接到帶鋸3 5 0 的馬達，同時切斷鋸片。另外，一個或多個掣爪（圖中未 顯示出來）可以在架構上被設計成當纜線切割裝置3 6 6 切斷鋸片的同一時刻這些掣爪會嚙合該鋸片’並停止它的 移動，藉此，確保鋸片在被切斷之後不會繼續地移動° 除了使用帶有利齒的刀葉之切削機器以外’許多普逋 的機器，像是接縫刨刀、刨床等’都使用大體上是圓柱形 狀的刀頭，在刀頭上設有一個或一個以上的狹長刀葉’這 些刀葉係安裝在刀頭的外表面。在操作上，刀頭圍繞著它 的圓柱中心軸線旋轉。當工件橫向通過刀頭的時候，刀葉 在工件之鄰接面上產生一道寬的切口。如同上述之其它切 削機器，使用圓柱形刀頭的機器假如在操作中的刀葉與使 用者的身體接觸，也可能會引起嚴重的傷害。因此’圖2 8說明一個使用在接縫刨刀5 0 0裏以防止對使用者造成 嚴重傷害的範例型安全止動機構3 0具體實施例。胃了® 面淸晰起見，該安全止動機構3 0的許多元件不顯示在® 2 8裏，因爲它們是類似於先前所述之使用在其它切肖 器裏的安全止動機構的元件。 接縫刨刀5 0 0包括有一個大體上爲圚柱形狀的7351 5 0 2，該刀頭5 0 2係安裝在一個心軸5 0 4上面’並 86 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210 X 297公釐） νκ--------訂---------線 ί ^ (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 經濟部智慧財產局員Η消費合作社印製 A7 45 8862 ____BL______ 五、發明說明（ff) 在該心軸上旋轉。心軸—般是被安裝在〜個或多個軸承組 合件（圖中未顯示出來）裏面，並且被一個馬達組合件（ 圖中未顯示出）可旋轉自如地帶動’該馬達組合件是直接 被聯接到心軸上，或是藉由一個皮帶和滑輪系統被聯接到 心軸。該刀頭被安裝在—個主框架組合件5 0 6裏，並在 進料檯5 0 8和出料擡5 1 0之間的空間裏向上延伸。一 個工件藉由將該工件沿著進料檯5+〇 8滑動通過該刀頭並 且進入到出料檯5 1 0而被切開。一般來說，進料檯5 0 8和出料檯5 1 0的垂直位置是可以獨立調整的，以控制 切口進入到工件裏面的深度。 刀頭經常是由像是鋼料等的金屬材料製成的，並且一 般包括有三個刀葉5 1 2，這些刀葉5 1 2被安裝在刀頭 的表面且延伸超出刀頭表面。將可從本技術說明中瞭解： 這些切削機器可以使用較多或較少的刀葉，本發明安全止 動機構3 0的使用不限於在刀頭5 0 2上面之刀葉數目。 一個或更多個非導電材料製成的襯套514是被置於在刀 '頭和心軸之間，以便將刀頭和刀葉與框架5 0 6隔離開。 充電板6 2和6 6可以被置放在鄰近該刀頭的位置，以聯 接由跨越刀頭之第一電氣系統3 8所產生的信號。在圖2 8之中，這些充電板（圖中以虛線表示）是被安裝在靠近 刀頭的一個平坦端部之部位上。另一個替代的方式是，該 心軸可以被與框架隔離，且這些充電板可以被設置在圍繞 心軸的四周，如先前配合圖5所作的說明一般。 由於相對較少的刀葉，使用者身體和刀頭之間的第〜 87 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210 297公釐） -衣--- (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 訂- -·線丨Γ 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 45 88 6 2 A7 B7 五 、發明說明 次接觸可能發生在這些刀葉的其中之一上面或是刀頭本身 的表面上。然而，這些刀葉和刀頭是電氣上被連接在一起 1所以任何與使用者身體的接觸不論是否發生在刀葉上都 能夠被偵測出來。一旦接觸被測知，剎車系統即被啓動， 以便快速地停止刀頭5 0 2的旋轉。 剎車系統可以包括一個樞轉掣爪，該樞轉掣爪能迴旋 並依上述之方式嚙接其中一片刀葉。掣爪在結構上被製作 成與刀頭的圓柱體有相同的寬度，以便嚙合刀葉的整個長 度’而不只是較小部份長度的刀葉。一般來說，在刀葉還 沒有撞撃到掣爪以前’掣爪將不會停止刀頭的旋轉，因爲 刀頭的表面是較爲滑的。掣爪在形狀上可以被設計成能夠 延伸進入到帶著刀葉的刀頭上的溝槽裏，以便確保掣爪除 了刀葉以外，也能夠嚙合刀頭本身。 除了剛才說明的樞轉掣爪系統以外，圖2 8顯示另一 個可取代先前說明之掣爪的掣爪架構，該架構包括有—個 被支撐在滑塊5 2 2上的平板5 2 0，該滑塊5 2 2係設 置在出料檯5 1 0的下方。當平板5 2 0被滑入到與刀頭 5 ◦ 2相接觸的時候，平板5 2 0即嚙接下一個通過的刀 葉，而停止住刀頭的轉動。平板5 2 0可以由任何能夠停 止刀頭的適當材料製成，這些材料包括：金屬、塑膠等等 。平板5 2 0可以由一個由可熔斷構件1 2 2固定住的弓輕 簧1 3 0抵靠在刀頭上滑行。該可熔斷構件1 2 2是環繞 在一對連接到點火系統（圖中未顯示出來）的接觸線柱5 2 4上面，以致於當偵測出與使用者身體發生接觸的時候 88 6紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210 X 297公釐） -------------,.-4 — (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) Ή. 線. 45BS ^ A7 B7 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 五、發明說明（ft) ，該可熔斷構件1 2 2即被熔化，而彈簧1 3 0被釋放開 。應注意到：該彈簧1 3 0是經由一個複式機構釋放出來 ，以容許有一個較高強度的彈簧而無需增加該可熔斷構件 12 2的尺寸大小。雖然’圖示中的平板5 2 0是設置在 刀頭的上部後側，替代這種安排方式，該平板也可以被放 置在進料台和出料台下方之任何鄰近刀頭的位置。例如， 該平板能夠被放置在進料台下方如圖中虛線所示的部位。 此外，也可以使用複數個平板，並將它們設置在譬如像是 刀頭的前側和背側等各種位置上。 對於一個具有三個刀葉且以大約每分鐘5 0 0 0轉的 速度旋轉的普通刀頭，該刀頭會在大約1 2毫秒內旋轉完 成一圏，而且，在與第一片刀葉的接觸和下一片刀葉的接 觸之間將是大約4毫秒。因此，該刀頭是較佳地應在自與 使用者身體接觸開始少於8毫秒以內完全停止，並且更佳 地是在少於4毫秒以內停住。在前一個情形裏，將不會有 超過2個刀葉接觸到使用者的身體，然而在後一個情彤裏 ，不會有超過1個刀葉接觸到使用者。然而，較長的停止 時間也可以被接受的。將可由本技術說明中瞭解：要讓安 全止動機構3 0的性能達到最佳的狀態，可以根據接觸偵 測和掣爪嚙合之間的時間來調整在刀頭四周的掣爪位置， 以確保該掣爪在通過刀葉之前段時間內嚙合刀頭’而不是 在通過一片刀葉之後才使掣爪嚙合刀頭。否則’該刀頭將 繼續旋轉直到下一片刀葉撞擊到掣爪爲止。另一替代的方 式是，該刀頭可以在結構上被製作成沿著刀頭的長度方向 89 本紙張尺度逋用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210 X 297公釐） ^--------訂---------線—.J (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 4 5 88^2 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 Α7 Β7 五、發明說明（d) 上設有一個或多個溝槽，像是在圖中5 2 9部位上的虛線 表示的一樣，這些溝槽被設計成可以容納掣爪。然後’假 如，掣爪在剛通過一片刀葉的時候嚙合住刀頭’該刀頭將 只旋轉到下一個通過的溝槽處即被阻止住，而不是要等到 下一片刀葉通過時才能停住。 除了前述以掣爪爲主要架構的刹車系統以外’圖2 8 也說明另一個替代性之系統，該系統之架構是要覆蓋住刀 葉，以防止它們對使用者造成傷害。明確地說，該替代性 之剎車系統包括一個實質可撓曲的薄片狀材料5 3 0，像 是塑膠、橡膠、金屬箔等等。該可撓曲薄片狀材料5 3 0 包括有一個鉤子5 3 2，鉤子5 3 2被設計成可適於嚙合 任何一個刀葉5 1 2。當鉤子5 3 2被推抵住刀頭5 0 2 的時候，下一個通過的刀葉捕捉到該鉤子5 3 2，使得可 撓曲薄片狀材料5 3 0在刀頭旋轉的時候捲繞在刀頭四周 。因而，刀葉被薄片狀材料5 3 0所覆蓋住，該材料便可 保護使用者避免受到嚴重的傷害。將該鉤子5 3 2安裝在 平板5 2 0或其它致動器組合件的前段可以讓該夠子$ 3 2進入與刀頭相接觸狀態。一般來說，夠子5 3 2的外表 面是呈圓形的或是設有斜面，以防止當鉤子5 3 2被拉動j 繞著該刀頭的時候對使用者造成傷害。材料5 3 〇可以被 存放在一個捲筒上面’或可以被自由地吊掛在該飽子5 3 2的下方直到被捲繞在刀頭四周爲止。較f圭的是；,η]*^^ 薄片狀材料5 3 0有足夠的長度’以便能夠完全覆蓋住所 有的刀葉。另一個替代方式是，薄片狀材料5 3 〇上與鉤 90 ------'4--------訂---------線—.- (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 本纸張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210 X 297公釐） 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印制^ 45 88 6 > A7 ______B7 _ 五、發明說明（g》） 子5 3 2相反的一端可以被扣牢固住，以便在刀頭旋轉完 —個完整的一圈以前將刀頭停止下來。另外地，或替代地 ’可以關閉該接縫刨刀馬達組合件以停止刀頭的旋轉。一 個類似的系統可以被實施在圓形鋸片之鋸子上以覆蓋住尖 銳的館齒。 類似於接縫刨刀，刨床也使用表面上設有一個或多個 切刀刀葉的圓柱形刀頭。一般而言，該刀頭是被安裝在一 床台上方，該床台具有一個或多個進給滾輪，以及一個工 件沿著這些滾輪通過刀頭的下方。將可由本技術說明瞭解 :安全止動機構3 0可以被設計成類似以上配合接縫刨刀 所作之說明的止動機構以配合刨床使用。因此，使用在刨 床中的安全止動機構3 0之實施方法將不再被個別獨立地 解釋。另外，也將可瞭解到：安全止動機構3 0可以類似 地被設計成配合其它使用旋轉刀頭的機器來使用，這些機 器包括：成形機、刻槽機等等。 雖然，安全止動機構3 0已經在先前之解釋中其架構 係被設計成用來偵測刀葉和使用者身體的接觸，由本技術 說明中可瞭解到：該安全止動機構3 0也可以另外地或替 代地被設計成架構上能夠用來偵測其它的危險情況。譬如 ，安全止動機構3 0可以在架構上被設計爲利用監控刀葉 的速度或偏轉來偵測潛在的突跳。假如’偵測得知在（仍 有動力供給的情形下）刀葉速度上有一個急速的下降或在 鋸片上產生一個重大偏轉，刹車系統將被觸發以停止該刀 葉或鋸片D刀葉速度可以任何適當的裝置來量取’像是轉 91 \1/· — — — —— ^ ------ I I ·111[11-- (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210x 297公釐） 為 b S 2 A7 —-- -- B7____ 五、發明說明（J ) 速計等等。鋸片偏轉也可以利用設置在鋸片旁側的微動開 關或類似的方法來偵測得知。本發明也可以用來監控其它 的危險狀況。確實地’對於安全止動機構3 0，是希望能 夠有在多種情形之其中任一種情形發生即可觸動的安全止 動機構3〇。 應該注意到：本發明的偵測和剎車系統和它的元件是 分別獨立地有用的。譬如，本發明之剎車系統能夠被用來 配合一個有如在發明背景中所述之肉品去皮機裏的以手套 爲設計基礎的接觸系統，或是任何其它適當的接觸偵測系 統。相似地，許多不同的刹車系統能夠被用來配合本發明 之接觸偵測系統。更進一步地’該可熔斷構件和點火系統 可以被使用在任何需要快速釋放偏壓機構之構件的系統之 中。 \3/^ K.-------訂---------線 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 92 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（21〇χ 297公釐）45 88 $ V. Description of the invention (0) Low voltage supply source V and ground. A 0 · 1 microfarad capacitor 430 stabilizes the output of this reference voltage. As before — this reference voltage is used to adjust the trigger point. The output of the second comparator 4 2 0 is connected to the base terminal of a η π η bipolar junction transistor 4 3 1 which is, for example, a 2 N 3 9 0 4 transistor. The base of the transistor 4 3 1 is also connected to a low voltage supply source V ′ via a 100 ohm resistor 4 3 2 and to a grounded ground via a 2 2 pico farad capacitor 4 3 4 . The potentiometer 4 3 2 is adjusted so that the voltage at the positive terminal of the second comparator 4 2 0 is slightly lower than the peak value of the signal received at the negative terminal of the second comparator when there is no contact between the saw blade and the user's body. . Therefore, each high cycle of the signal causes the output of the second comparator 4 2 0 to be a low potential, thereby causing the 2 2 picofarad capacitor 4 3 4 to discharge. As long as no contact occurs between the saw blade and the user's body, the output of the second comparator 4 2 0 continues to remain low, preventing the capacitor 4 3 4 from charging through the resistor 4 3 2 to charge the η ρ η bipolar junction The transistor 4 3 1 is turned on. However, when the user's body touches the saw blade, the signal received at the negative terminal of the second comparator 4 2 0 remains below the reference voltage at the positive terminal, while the signal of the second comparator 4 2 0 The output remains high. As a result, the capacitor 4 3 4 can be charged through the resistor 4 3 2 and the transistor 4 3 1 is turned on. The collector terminal of the transistor 4 3 1 is connected to the low voltage supply source V, however, its emitter terminal is connected to a 680 ohm resistor 4 3 6. When the transistor 4 3 1 is turned on, it supplies an output signal of about 40 milliamps through the resistor 4 3 6 and the output signal is sent to the alternative 46. The paper size applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) (Please read the precautions on the back before filling in this page>. 丨 line · A7 B7 88 62 V. Description of the invention (fp ignition system 1 1 5. This alternative ignition circuit 1 1 5 includes a fusible element connected between a high-voltage supply source Η V and a silicon controlled rectifier such as ντε 5 5 5 2 SCR 1 2 2. The gate end of the silicon controlled rectifier Is connected to resistor 4 3 6. So 'when transistor 4 3 1 is turned on', a current of about 40 mA is passed through resistor 4 3 6 to activate the silicon controlled rectifier 4 3 8 'tolerate this high voltage The supply source ΗV is discharged through the fusible element 1 2 2 to ground. Once the silicon controllable rectifier is switched on, as long as the current through the fusible element 1 2 2 is maintained above a holding current of about 40 milliamps or more , Even if the current to the gate extreme disappears, it will still It will continue to work, so 'the silicon controlled rectifier will direct current through the fusible element until the fusible element is melted or the high voltage source disappears. Figure 6 also illustrates an exemplary electrical supply system 4 4 0' The The electrical supply system 4 4 0 is architecturally designed to provide low voltage supply source V and high voltage supply source 标准 V from a standard 120 VAC voltage line. The electrical supply system 4 4 0 is connected A low-voltage supply source V and a high-voltage supply source Η V are provided for the alternative first electrical system 38, the alternative second electrical system 88, and the alternative ignition system 115. The voltage line is passed through a 10 The 0 ohm resistor 4 4 2 and a diode 4 1 4 like 1 Ν 4 0 0 2 are connected to a 1 0 0 microfarad charge storage capacitor 4 4 6. The diode only passes The positive part of the voltage line, so as to charge the capacitor 4 4 6 to reach a potential of about 160 volts relative to the ground. The capacitor 4 4 47 This paper size applies to Chinese national standards (CNS> A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) (please first Read the notes on the back and fill in this page again) Order!-Line · Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs ^ Ρ 45 45 62 62 A7 B7 Employees of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs spend together £ ρϊ 5. The positive and negative ends of Invention Note 6 are used as High voltage supply source ΗV connected to the fusible element 1 2 2. When the contact between the saw blade and the user's body is detected and the silicon controlled rectifier 4 3 8 is turned on, it is stored in the capacitor 4 4 6 Is discharged through the fusible member 1 2 2 'until the fusible member 1 2 2 is melted. It can be understood from this description that the size of the capacitor 4 4 6 can be changed according to actual needs to supply the amount of current necessary to fuse the fusible member 1 2 2. It should be noted from this description that the use of a high voltage HV capacitor results in a much larger current surge, and thus it is possible to melt the fusible member faster than can be achieved with a low voltage system. The positive terminal of capacitor 4 4 6 also provides a voltage source with fewer transformers as a low voltage supply source V. The low voltage supply V includes a positive terminal connected to capacitor 4 4 6 and a negative 40 volt. 1 2 ohm resistors 4 4 8 between nano diodes 4 5 0. The purpose of the diode 450 is to maintain a relatively fixed potential of 40 volts at the junction between the diode and the resistor 44.8. It will be clear from this description that the current through this 12 ohm resistor will be about 10 milliamps. Most of this current is used by the low voltage circuit, which has a relatively fixed current requirement of about 8 milliamps. It should be noted that: Although the resistor 4 48 and the diode 4 50 release some current from the capacitor 4 46, the voltage supply line continues to recharge the capacitor to maintain a high voltage supply. V. A 0.1 microfarad capacitor 4 5 2 is connected in parallel to the diode 4 5 0 'to provide the 48 (please read the unintentional matter on the back before filling out this page) The paper size is in accordance with the national standard (CNS) A4 Regulation [^ 7'297 public love) -------- Order --------- ^ i: -------------------- -8 8 0 p. A7 I -------- B7__ ______ V. Description of the Invention (¢ 4)) (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) The buffer of 40 volts for the diode, the diode then It is connected to the input of an adjustable voltage regulator 4 5 4 such as an LM 3 1 7 voltage regulator. The ratio of a 1 仟 ohm resistor 4 5 6 connected between the output terminal and the adjustment terminal and a 2 2 仟 ohm resistor 4 5 8 'between the adjustment terminal and the ground will be The output voltage of the adjustable voltage regulator 4 5 4 is set to a voltage of approximately 3 OO VDC. A 50 microfarad capacitor 460 is connected to the output of the adjustable voltage regulator 4 5 4 to temporarily store sufficient charge to ensure that the low voltage supply source V can provide the silicon controlled rectifier 4 3 8 A short 40 mA pulse is required. The aforementioned low-voltage supply source is advantageous because of its low cost and simple structure. "Line. It should be noted that when the high voltage supply source Η V is discharged through the fusible element 1 2 2, the input voltage connected to the adjustable voltage regulator 4 5 4 may temporarily drop below 30 volts. In the following, therefore, a corresponding drop in the low-voltage supply source V is caused. However, because the braking system has been triggered, for the detection system, it no longer needs to continue to function as before, and any in the low-voltage supply source The drop in V will not harm the function of the safety stop mechanism 30. The consumption of employees of the Ministry of Intellectual Property Bureau ^ Zhatuhu will be understood by those familiar with the electrical technology field: the first electrical system 38 Alternative embodiments of the electrical system 8 8, the ignition system 115, and the electrical supply system 440 can be implemented in a single substrate or a single package. In addition, the various electrical circuits described above The specific number of components can be changed depending on their use. Figure 7 illustrates an alternative design of the brake system 34, which is architecturally designed to utilize the ignition system 1 1 5 49 This paper size applies to the National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) Member of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs% A Liang _ Zha Tu_2 A7 _ B7__ V. Description of the invention (¢ ^)) Current supplied Concentrated on a very small area of the fusible element 1 2 2. The alternative brake system 34 includes a brake pawl 1 40, which is set in a position that can be set to the spring 1 3 0 Driven by the saw blade 64, the spring 130 is squeezed between the pawl and a spring block 470. The pawl is pushed against the brake by the fusible member 1 2 2 The force of the spring 130 is kept slightly apart from the saw blade. The fusible member 12 is attached to the pawl, for example, it is wound around a hook provided on the pawl 4 7 2. On the other way, the fusible member can be fixed to the pawl by a screw or other disclosed mechanism. The fusible member 1 2 2 is also wound around a high-voltage contact post 4 7 4 And a discharge contact around the pole 4 7 6. This high voltage contact pole 4 7 4 is connected to the electrical supply The high voltage supply source Η V of system 4 4 0, however, the discharge contact post 4 7 6 is a silicon controlled rectifier 4 3 8 which is connected to an alternative ignition system 1 1 5. When the silicon controlled rectifier 4 When 38 is turned on, the charge supplied by the high-voltage supply source ΗV is mainly discharged through a small fusible member 4 7 8 between the posts 4 7 4 and 4 7 6. This is used as a concentrated discharge current to A relatively small portion of the fusible member 1 2 2 ensures that the fusible member can be completely and quickly melted with less stored charge. Generally speaking, it is hoped that the fusible member 4 7 8 can be exhausted. Possibly short in order to minimize the length of fuses that need to be heated. As shown in FIG. 7 and FIG. 8, the high-voltage contact post 4 7 4 and the discharge contact post 4 7 6 can be architecturally designed as the opposite side of a single structure and an insulating layer 4 7 9 is set at 50- ----------- c -------- Order --------- line 丨 丨 ----------------- ----- {Please read the notes on the back before filling this page) This paper size is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) A7 458862 ______B7__ 5. Description of the Invention (iff) (Please Read the notes on the back before filling out this page). The spacing between these posts is typically between 1/6 4 and 1/8 inches. Once the fusible member 1 2 2 is melted, the brake spring generally presses the pawl into engagement with the saw blade as described above. . Although the alternative design of the braking system 34 has been described above in conjunction with the alternative ignition system 115, it can be understood from the present invention that the alternative braking system 34 can also be combined with the ignition system 1 15 shown in FIG. Specific embodiments are used together. In this case, the high-voltage contact post 4 7 4 will be connected to the emitter of the transistor 1 1 8, however, the discharge contact post 4 7 6 will be connected to the ground ground. -Line. Printed by the Consumer Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs because the contact detection system 3 2 and the brake system 34 are architecturally designed to stop the cutting tool 14 when it comes into contact with the user's body, It is also desirable to be able to stop the motor assembly 12 to prevent damage to the motor as the motor attempts to drive the cutting tool. However, because the machine 10 is generally designed to stop when the cutting tool is bitten or for other reasons, etc., it is often sufficient if the motor assembly can be shut down within a few seconds. This can be achieved by turning off the power to the motor. Therefore, in an alternative specific embodiment, the brake start is sent from the second electrical system 88 is also used to activate a normally closed switching relay in the wire circuit of the electromagnetic contactor 16 (not shown in the figure). show). Similar to pressing the stop switch 2o, although the pendant switch is relayed: when actuated, the power is cut off from the magnetic contactor line ，, so the motor is also cut off. It will be understood from this description that there are many other methods that can be used to close the motor assembly. These methods are all within the scope of the present invention. As an illustrative example 51 This paper size: National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 458862 Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs A7 ________B7 V. Description of the invention) Electricity can be directly controlled by the safety stop mechanism 30 (for example, through solid-state on-off switches, etc.). At the same time, it is only necessary to disengage the existing overload circuit to shut down the stopped motor. Because the detection circuit described above relies on certain electrical characteristics of the human body. 'When cutting certain materials, such as metal foil-clad insulation,' using the safety stop mechanism 30 may cause the detection circuit to incorrectly record the tool and User exposure. Therefore, it would be desirable to have a function interruption control to prevent the brake from operating during a particular cutting operation. An appropriate functional interruption control may include a mechanical switch provided between the fusible member 12 and the ignition system 115. Alternatively, the switch may be a single-use switch whose architecture is such that it must reset itself after each use. As another alternative, the safety stop mechanism 30 may be provided with a sensor near the workpiece to detect the presence of a metal foil or the like, and interrupt the function of the brake system. This—the latter alternative eliminates the need for the user to remember to interrupt and resume the functioning of the brake system. As an alternative to stopping the function of the safety stop mechanism 30, the contact detection system can be architecturally designed to distinguish metal from the user's body. For example, when the user's body comes into contact with the data sheet, the input signal received by the second electrical system 88 is attenuated, but not grounded. However, if a metal workpiece (the workpiece is in contact with a grounded machine frame) comes into contact with the saw blade, the input signal coupled to the saw blade will be released to the ground, so that the second electrical system 88 will be completely No signal will be received. Therefore, the second electrical system 8 8 can be used in the framework of 52 paper standards applicable to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specifications (210 X 297 mm)-·). Λ Order-(Please read the precautions on the back before filling (This page) Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 40as ^? A7 ____ B7 5. The invention description is designed to only receive a signal that is attenuated and the signal has a lower threshold than previously set. When a spike 一个 is higher than a second critical 値, a start signal is output to the ignition system 1 1 5. It should be understood from this description that in a commercialized embodiment of the present invention, many electronic functions can be incorporated into a dedicated integrated circuit (A S I C). In addition, at least some or all of the electronic components can be powered by a battery, rather than being supplied by a power supply to a machine. However, the electric charge required to melt the fusible member 1 2 2 will preferably be supplied by a current line to retain the power of the battery and because of the higher voltage available. You may also want to have a logical control system. The system is designed in architecture: when the machine is turned on or off and in use, many self-tests and other security checks can be made to ensure that the safety stop The mechanism 30 is operating normally, and a logic control system that prevents accidental triggering of the braking system β and the like can be done in any desired test sequence using many methods. FIG. 9 illustrates a flowchart of an exemplary logic sequence. The example sequence begins when the user initially supplies power to the system. This step is identified by 600. Next, the logic system is represented by 602 as shown in the figure: first check to determine whether the interval between the saw blade and the charging board is correct. The interval between the saw blade and the charging plate can be measured using any suitable mechanism, such as the one described in more detail below. If the interval exceeds the acceptable limit, the system responds with an error signal. This step is shown in the flowchart as 604. This error signal can be an audible and / or visible signal, etc. Preferably, the logic system stays in an error state 53 \ / /. '-------- Order ---------- Γ i (Please read the precautions on the back before filling in this (Page) This paper size is in accordance with Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) d 5 SB Β 2 A7 _ B7 V. Description of the invention (ϋ), and prevent further operation of the machine until the correct one is detected The interval between the saw blade and the charging board. If the interval between the saw blade and the charging board is acceptable, the logic system determines whether the first electrical system has detected an appropriate (ie, unattenuated) input signal from the first electrical system. In the flowchart, this The steps are labeled 6 06. This step ensures that the brake will not be accidentally triggered when the machine starts due to one of the first and / or second electrical systems, a grounded saw blade, incorrect placement of the charging board, etc. If the proper input signal is not detected, the system responds with an error signal 604, which can be a siren in the form of a flasher or a similar indicator. It will be understood that each error condition can be expressed using the same error signal or a different error signal. If an appropriate input signal is detected, the system begins to determine whether there is a fusible element. This is marked as step 608 in the flowchart. The presence or absence of a fusible member can be determined by any suitable method. These methods include measuring the electrical conductivity between the high voltage contact post 4 7 4 and the discharge contact post 4 7 6. If no fusible element is present, the system responds with an error signal 604. The system then checks the amount of charge stored in the charge storage device 'as in step 6 1 2 of the flow chart. This step ensures that if a contact is detected, there is sufficient charge to melt the fusible element. If not enough charge is detected, the logic system responds with an error signal to inform that there is not enough charge detected in a predetermined time. In the example sequence, after the scheduled inspection is completed, the logic 54 paper size applies to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 x 297 public love) (Please read the precautions on the back before filling out this page) I Line. Consumption by employees of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs ^ · 'Printed by the Zuosha 45 88 Printed by the Employees ’Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs A7 B7 V. Description of the invention d) The system allows electricity to be sent to the motor assembly 1 2 as Step 6 1 4 in the figure. It will be understood from this description that if no fault is detected, the above electrical sequence is generally completed in less than one second. In addition, additional inspection steps can be taken before the motor assembly is activated. In addition to a preliminary start-up power sequence, the logic system can also be architecturally designed to perform many checks during operation. For example, the rotation of the saw blade can be monitored by a well-known mechanism, and the ignition system can temporarily interrupt its function when the saw blade is not moving. This allows the user to touch the saw blade when it is stopped without engaging the pawl with the saw blade. Some embodiments may be architecturally designed to ensure that the safety stop mechanism will continue to function even if the power to the machine is turned off and if the saw blade continues to rotate. As an illustrative example: If an error other than contact detection occurs, such as: the incorrect interval between the plate and the charging plate, insufficient charge on the charge storage device, etc., the lead to the motor assembly Power can be cut off. It will be clear from this description: a logic control system can be implemented to provide many different safety and / or operational functions as desired. In addition to the spring and fusible member systems described above, other systems can be used to move the pawl into contact with the saw blade. For example, as shown in Figure 10, a relatively small explosive charge 150, which is in the form of an explosive tube or explosive device, can be used to drive the pawl against the data piece. An example of a suitable explosive charge is an M-1000 explosive device available from Stresau Laboratory, Inc. of Spooner, Wisconsin. 55, ------- I order ---------- line (Please read the precautions on the back before filling in this page) This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 specifications (21〇 χ 297 mm) 45 88 6 Printed by the Consumer Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs A7 B7 V. Description of Invention (夂)) An exemplary embodiment of an explosive charge actuation system is illustrated in FIG. 10. Although any suitable explosive charge system can be used, however, this exemplary embodiment preferably uses an independent self-contained charge or explosive tube 150 to increase safety and focus the explosion The force is in the direction in which the pawl moves. A trigger lead 1 6 4 extends from the charge to trigger an explosion. By inserting the explosive charge 150 between the pawl and a fixing block 166 adjacent to the charge, the explosive charge 150 can be used to move the pawl 140. When the charge exploded, the pawl was pushed away from the fixed block. A compression spring 130 is placed between the fixing block and the pawl to ensure that the pawl does not spring back from the blade when the charge is detonated. Prior to detonation, the pawl is held away from the saw blade, and the charge is placed in the fixed block and pawl by friction fit. However, the force produced by the charge explosion is far more than the force required to overcome this friction fit < The other way is that the pawl can be fixed away from the saw blade by other mechanisms, such as: a fragile member, gravity, a spring between the pawl and a fixed block (not shown in the figure) and many more. It will be clear from this description that the position of the charge relative to the pivot bolt 1 4 2 will determine the distance the other end of the pawl moves. The closer the charge is to the other end of the pivot bolt 1 4 2 ′, the farther it moves. However, when the charge is moved closer to the bolt, as the moment arm becomes smaller, the amount of force required to move the pawl will increase. Therefore, for a specific amount of explosive force, the pawl may move more slowly. Furthermore, it will be understood from this description that there are many other methods besides the specific embodiments of springs and explosive charges described above. 56 This paper size is applicable to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 grid (210 X 297 public love) -------- Order --------- line (please read the notes on the back before filling this page) Printed by the Consumer Cooperative of Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 45δδ6 £ Α7- ----------- Β7 ____ 5. Description of the Invention (Jrf) can be used to bring the pawl into contact with the cutting tool. For example, a DC solenoid valve can be overspeeded by a current surge to produce a rapid movement. Alternatively, a pressurized air cylinder can also be used to supply pressure ' instead of a brake spring or charge. The pawl can be used as an alternative. The pawl can be supported on an electromagnet that is actuated by an ignition system to repel the pawl against the top saw blade or release the spring action The pawl is pressed onto the saw blade. Now to focus the discussion in more depth on the pawl, it can be buried in this description: the pawl can be made from one or more of many materials. Examples of suitable materials include plastics like polycarbonate , Rubber, wood, etc. 'or even soft metals like lead or aluminum. Although it is not absolutely necessary, it is generally hoped that the pawl has sufficient strength so that the saw blade cannot be easily cut through, but it needs to have sufficient softness so as to be able to absorb a part of the saw blade caused by sudden stop Impact force. After the brake has been triggered, the fuse needs to be replaced normally, and the pawl may also need to be replaced. The blade may also be damaged depending on how fast it stops it, or at least the pawl that engages the blade needs to be removed. Indeed, in an alternative embodiment of the brake system, the pawl is interrupted by a saw blade having a sufficiently strong and hard material, rather than blocking the saw blade from moving. The brake pawl 140 can also be architecturally designed to have a narrow contact surface that engages a large portion of the saw blade. Examples of this alternative architecture are schematically illustrated in Figures 11 to 13. As can be seen from these figures, the brake pawl 14 0 is mounted on a pair of pivot arms 14 1. These two pivot arms 1 4 1 can have the same or 57 papers that are again applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 x 297 mm) \ / -------- Order ----- ---- Line (Please read the notes on the back before filling in the form page) A7 45 8862 _ — _ B7 _ V. Description of the invention (jrp different lengths and can be installed on a pivot table (not shown in the figure) ), And the pivot table can be on the outside or inside of the saw blade. An advantage of the pawl with a narrow contact surface is that the force exerted by the pawl is distributed to a very large portion of the saw blade. In most cases, this allows the saw blade to be blocked more quickly. Longer contact surfaces can also be used to reduce the chance of damage to the saw blade because the braking force is distributed to more Although the above specific exemplary embodiments are described with a single brake pawl engaged with the saw blade teeth, the brake system may also include two One or more parts engage the pawl to reduce the stopping time of the saw blade Intermittent or extended blocking force. The present invention can also use claws that contact the opposite sides of the saw blade. Figure 14 illustrates an exemplary embodiment using two claw clamps to hold the opposite side of the saw blade. As shown in the figure, the brake pawls 140 are pivotably mounted on both sides of the saw blade 64. Each pawl includes a contact head 1 7 0 close to the saw blade, and a contact head 1 7 0 Lever arm 1 7 2 in the opposite direction. The two pawls are pivotably mounted on a pin 1 7 4 which passes through the contact head 1 7 0 and the lever arm on the pawl. 1 7 2 pivot hole. Therefore, when the lever arm 1 2 of each pawl is rotated upward (as shown in FIG. 14), the two contact heads 17 0 are close to each other. These pawls are It is installed in a position relative to the saw blade, so that the contact head 170 rotates toward the saw blade in the direction of the moving stroke of the saw blade. Once these claws contact and hold the saw blade, they are The moving movement is pulled downwards and continues to pivot inward. As a result, the saw blade was adapted to China in 58 paper sizes Home Standard (CNS) A4 size (2] 0 X 297 mm) " - - - - fi- - - - - - - ^ --------- set. ----- II— (Please read the notes on the back before filling out this page) Printed by the Consumer Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs-^ 458802 A7 B7 Printed by the Consumer Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs ^ V. Invention Explanation (κί) The iy clamp is tightened between the contact surfaces of these pawls until the pawls can no longer be moved closer. At this time, the saw blade is clamped between these pawls and Stop it. In order to ensure that the two pawls fit against the saw blade and are brought together, a link 1 7 6 is provided at both ends of which is connected to a lever arm 1 2 7. The central portion of the connecting rod 176 extends beyond the saw blade and rests on the end of the brake spring 130. As discussed above, the brake spring 1 3 is bent and fixed by the fusible member 1 2 2, and the fusible member 1 2 2 is connected to the contact post 1 3 6. The interval between the rain pawl contact head and the saw blade is controlled by adjusting the position of the spring. When the fusible member 1 2 2 is melted, the spring drives the link 17 6 to move upward. If 'only one pawl contacts the pin first, the upward movement of the link is transmitted to the other pawl until the other pawl also touches the saw blade. It will be clear from this description that the above dual claw system can make many changes to its actual implementation within the scope of the present invention. For example, the link can be driven upward by any one of the aforementioned actuating mechanisms, which include explosive charges, solenoid valves, compressed air, and the like. As a description of another specific embodiment ', one or more pawls may be provided only at one side of the pavilion. Alternatively, the link can be omitted 'and each pawl is actuated by an independent spring, explosive charge, solenoid valve, and the like. In order to increase the gripping action of the pawl on the saw blade, the contact surface of the pawl may be covered with a relatively high coefficient of friction material, such as rubber. On the other side, the paper size of this paper is applicable to + national standard (CNS) A ^ size (210 X 297 mm) factory -------- order --------- line (please read the back first) Please note this page and fill in this page again) 4 5 8 8 6 ,; A7 B7 5. The description of the invention (| / j) is' These claws can be made of a harder material than the saw blade, and let the claws Has a ridged surface so that it can be shown as shown. Normally bites into the saw blade. Another way is, or an additional method is, the saw blade can be provided with a grip structure in the shape of the structure, such as a high friction coefficient material coating, grooves, dents, holes, protrusions, etc. To further enhance the gripping action of the pawl. As previously mentioned, it is often desirable to be able to place the pawl closer to the saw blade to reduce the time required to move the pawl into contact with the saw blade. Although the optimal separation distance between the pawl and the blade may vary depending on the shape of the particular cutting tool, detection system, and / or brake system, it has been found that between the pawl and the blade A spatial distance of about 1/3 2 inches to 1/4 inches can provide a suitable effect in the above-described embodiment of the spring action. However, as is well known in this technical field, cutting tools such as saw blades and the like do not have exactly the same size. For example, for a nominal diameter of 10 inches and 0. 12 5 inch circular saw blades of nominal thickness, actual saw blades from different manufacturers or for different purposes may have a range of # # 9. 5 inches to 10. Diameters between 5 inches, and thicknesses ranging from ON0 75 inches to 0.15 inches. Therefore, in order to ensure a consistent braking speed ', it is necessary to adjust the position of the pawl every time the blade is changed. The braking system 34 can optionally use an automatic mechanism and / or a self-contained mechanism to ensure that the distance between the pawl and the cutting tool is within an acceptable range. It can be understood from this description: there are many = 60 Γ Jing first read the precautions on the back before filling out this page) Order:-Line · Printed by the Consumers' Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs This paper is applicable to the standard of the paper A4 specifications (210 X 297 mm) 458862 A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (^ /) Structures can be used to automatically determine the space between the pawls. These mechanisms include electrical, mechanical, optical, etc. Example: FIG. 15 shows a pawl 180 has a capacitor system for detecting the correct pawl spacing. Similar to the brake pawl 1 40 shown in FIG. 2, the pawl 1 80 may be provided with an inclined surface 1 8 2 ′ which is inclined or otherwise shaped so as to be able to quickly and completely engage the teeth of a cutting tool . In addition, the pawl 18 0 includes a pair of substantially parallel and spaced apart parallel arms 1 8 4, and the parallel arms 1 8 4 extend beyond the inclined surface 1 8 2. The parallel arm 1 8 4 is disposed and extends on both sides of the saw blade ', and when the pawl is placed in a position close to the saw blade, the parallel arm 1 8 4 does not touch the pin blade. Each parallel arm 1 8 4 is provided with a capacitor plate 1 8 6. The capacitor plate is located on the inner side of the parallel arm adjacent to the saw blade. Conductive leads 1 8 8 extend from each capacitor plate 1 8 6 to the appropriate saw blade detector circuit (not shown). The capacitor plate 1 8 6 is located on the parallel arm 1 8 4 so that when the interval of the pawl is within a desired range, the saw blade extends between the two capacitor plates 1 8 6. It is clear from this description that the capacitance across the two capacitor plates 186 will vary depending on whether the saw blade is located between the capacitor plates. The saw blade detection circuit is designed to drive an electrical signal through the conductive leads 1 8 and detect the change in capacitance across the two capacitor plates. Appropriate circuits that can be used with the pawl 180 are well known to those skilled in the art. These suitable circuits may include the first electrical system 38 and the second electrical system 88 similar to those previously described. system. These capacitor boards can be selected to adopt a structure that can detect whether the pawls are too close or not close enough (please read the precautions on the back before filling out this purchase). The paper size printed by the consumer cooperatives is in accordance with the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (21 × X 297 mm> 4 5 88 6 2 Employees of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs, printed by the consumer cooperatives A7 B7 c V. Description of the invention) Saw blades . Another alternative is' two pairs of capacitor plates can be placed on the pawl; one pair of capacitor plates is used to detect whether the pawls are too close to the saw blade, and the other pair of capacitor plates is used to detect whether the pawls are too close. Too far from the saw blade. In all cases, the detector circuit is designed to generate an error signal and / or stop the machine when the correct claw interval cannot be measured. Although an exemplary automatic claw interval detection system has been described above, it can be understood from this description that many changes or modifications can be made within the scope of the present invention. For example, two capacitor boards can be placed on the same side of the blade, rather than on opposite sides. These capacitor plates and / or blade detection circuits can be independently located outside the pawl and separated from the pawl. In the latter case, for example, the capacitor boards and detection circuits may be mounted on a separate electronic circuit board, and the electronic circuit board is fixed to the pawl. Another alternative is that these capacitor plates can be replaced with one or more light emitting diodes and detectors, so that when the claws are properly positioned, the saw blade will obstruct the diodes and The beam path between the detectors. Other methods for detecting the approach of the blade to the paw are also possible. The following can be used as a further option: The functions of the capacitor plates 1 8 6 and 1 8 8 can be used as charging plates 6 2 and 6 6 instead of or in addition to the claw interval detector. Plus capacitor plate. Alternatively, a detection plate can be mounted on the slanted surface 1 2 of the pawl. This detection board can be used to detect the driving input signal used as contact detection. The magnitude of the signal measured on the detection board will be inversely proportional to the interval between the detection board and the sawtooth. If the size of this signal does not exceed 62, this paper size is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) ΐ-Β ·-Line ·? A7 B7 V. Description of the invention) A known limitation, the system will determine that this situation indicates that the pawl surface is not close to the saw blade to a sufficient degree. . Because the height and / or angle of the saw blade can be adjusted for many cutting machines, it may be desirable to mount the pawl on a portion of the machine frame that moves with the saw blade. This arrangement will ensure that the pawl is maintained in a predetermined position relative to the saw blade. Similarly, the charging plate is preferably installed in a place that can be moved with the saw blade or the pivot axis so as to maintain a predetermined fixed interval therebetween. An exemplary embodiment has been described above. In this embodiment, the charging lever is configured to be movable together with the pivot shaft. As an alternative, a fixed pawl can be architecturally designed to engage the saw blade in any orientation. An exemplary embodiment of such a fixed pawl is illustrated in Figs. 16 and 17. In a specific embodiment of this exemplary type, the brake system 34 includes an elongated pawl 200. The elongated pawl 200 is sized and shaped to extend along the outer periphery of the saw blade 64 as if it is adjusted in the vertical direction. Similarly, the width of the narrow pawl 200 is designed to extend the inclined width of the saw blade 64. As shown in FIGS. 16 and 17, the long and narrow pawl 200 is installed in a vertical stroke substantially parallel to the saw blade and is substantially perpendicular to the tilt axis of the saw blade. As a result, the space between the saw blade and the contact surface 202 remains the same regardless of the position and orientation of the saw blade. The upper end of the long and narrow pawl 2 0 0 is pivotably attached to the pivot arm 2 0 4 through a pivot pin 2 0 6 'The pivot pin 2 0 6 passes through one end of the pivot arm 2 0 4 Go to the side of the pawl. Pivot arm 2 0 4 of 63 (please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) and order, '-丨 · Printed on paper standards applicable to China National Standards (CNS) A4 Specifications (210 X 297 mm) A7 4-5 88 6 2 ------ B7_ V. Description of the invention (") The end is pivotably attached to one or more by the pivot pin 210 On the mounting seat (not shown). The lower end of the narrow pawl 2 0 0 is pivotably attached to the lower pivot arm 2 0 3, and the pivot pin 2 0 5 passes through One end of the lower pivoting arm 203 enters the side of the pawl. The lower pivoting arm 203 is pivotably connected to the mounting base (not shown in the figure) by using a pivot pin 209. The spring 2 1 2 is attached to the side of the lower pivot arm 2 3 near the pivot pin 2 0 9 and on the opposite side to the pivot pin 2 05. Therefore, the narrow pawl 2 0 0 is architecturally Designed to rotate toward the blade 64 or away from the blade 64. The size and position of the pivot arm 2 0 4 and the pivot pin 2 0 9 are designed so that the narrow pawl 2 0 0 cannot be upward Pivot pass The saw blade does not hit the edge of the saw blade. When the pawl hits the saw blade while the saw blade is rotating, the movement of the saw blade causes the pawl to continue to pivot upward until the pawl is firmly wedged Between the saw blade and the pivoting arm, thereby stopping the saw blade. The contact surface of the pawl can be added with a bite texture, coating, etc. to strengthen the grip between the pawl and the saw blade Acting force. The narrow pawl 2 0 0 is biased upward by the action of a spring 2 1 2 and pivots to the saw blade. The spring 2 1 2 is, for example, fixed to the frame of the saw. Therefore, when the pawl 2 pivots freely At this time, the spring 2 1 2 drives the pawl to move rapidly toward the saw blade. Similar to the exemplary embodiment described above, the fusible member 1 2 2 is connected to the pawl so as to keep it away from the saw The fusible member 1 2 2 is designed in size to hold the pawl slightly away from the side edge of the fin. However, when a sufficient current passes through the fusible member 1 2 2 The 64 paper sizes are applicable to Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 Specifications (210 X 297 mm) ------ Order --------- Line (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) Ministry of Economic Affairs Intellectual Property Bureau Employee Consumer Cooperatives Printed Ministry of Economy Intellectual Property Bureau employee consumption cooperation Du printed 45 8B 6 2 A7 ____ §7__ _ _ V. Description of the invention ((ΛΟ Fusible member 1 2 2 will melt 'causing the biasing force of the pawl in the spring 2 1 2 Pivot toward the saw blade under the influence. It will be understood from this description that many changes can be made to the specific embodiment of the exemplary type shown in FIGS. 16 and 17 without departing from the scope of the present invention. For example, 'the pawl can be designed in the shape of the frame to pivot only in the direction of the saw blade under the influence of gravity. Another alternative is that the spring 2 1 2 can be a compression spring. Under normal circumstances, the compression spring fixes the pawl away from the saw blade until it is in another spring, explosive charge, solenoid valve. Under the influence of the pressure of the gas, gas pressure, etc., it is rotated upwards. Furthermore, the pawl can be mounted on the other side of the saw blade, so as to be pivoted downward into the saw blade under the influence of the spring, the explosive drug 'solenoid valve, the gas pressure, and the like. As previously described, the present invention provides a reliable system, where we call this system a safety stop mechanism. The safety stop mechanism 30 is used to stop the cutting tool when the cutting tool of the machine contacts the user's body. Although many exemplary specific embodiments of the safety stop mechanism 30 have been shown in the drawings and also explained in the previous description, it can be understood from this description that the specific implementation of the safety stop mechanism may follow The specific cutting tools installed in the mechanism vary. In order to provide additional explanation of the flexibility and versatility of the safety stop mechanism 30 of the present invention ', exemplary embodiments of the safety stop mechanism of the present invention will now be explained briefly by many common machines. Figure 18 shows the safety stop mechanism 30 used in a table saw. The saw blade 64 of the table saw is mounted on the mandrel 70. Mandrel 7 0 from 65 This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210x 297 mm) -------------- Order --------- Line ( Please read the precautions on the back before filling in this page) Consumption Cooperation by Employees of Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 45886 / A7 ----- B7_____ V. Description of the Invention (^ qiao) — a swing arm 2 2 〇 outward Extending (viewed from the direction of FIG. 18), the swing arm 2 2 0 pivots around a shaft 2 2 2 to raise and lower the pavilion. A worm wheel 2 2 4 engages an arc-shaped rack 'provided above the swing arm to pivot the swing arm 2 2 0 about the shaft. The safety stop mechanism 30 includes a bracket 2 2 8 attached to the swing arm 2 2 0, such as by one or more bolts 2 3 8 extending through the bracket 2 2 8 8 is fixed on the swing arm 2 2 0. Disposed on the mounting brackets 2 2 8 are charging plates 6 2 and 6 6. These charging plates are placed parallel to the plate 64, and are slightly separated from the saw blade 64, so as to create a capacitive shunt between these charging plates. These mounting brackets can be made of electrically insulating material or an electrical insulator can be placed between the bracket and the charging plate. The mounting bracket 2 2 8 extends from the end of the swing arm 2 2 0 beyond the side edge of the saw blade 6 4. A brake pawl 140 is pivotably mounted on a shoulder bolt 14 2 extending from the bracket. The free end of the pawl is biased towards the side edge of the saw blade by a compression spring 2 3 6. The spring is fixed between the pawl and a spring seat 2 38 in a compressed state, and the spring seat 2 3 8 extends from the bracket. A fusible member 1 2 2 is fixed between a pair of contact posts 24 0. The fusible member 1 2 2 is attached to the pawl and holds the pawl away from the side edge of the saw blade against the biasing action of the spring. An electronic device unit 2 4 2 includes a contact detector like the first electrical system 38 and the second electrical system 88 described above. Shielded electrical extension wires 60 and 90 respectively extend 66 from the electronic device unit. -------- Order --------- Wire-> I (Please read first Note on the back, please fill in this page again) This paper size is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) Printed by the Consumer Cooperative of Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 4 5 88 f Α7 ------- —— Yang V. Explanation of the invention (Shi +) to plates 6 2 and 6 6. The electronic device unit 2 4 2 also includes a current generator of the ignition system i 丄 5 described above, and the current generator = is connected to the contact post 2 4 G ... a power supply continuous line 2 4 4 from the electronic clothing Place the unit 2 4 to an appropriate power source (not shown). When the contact detector detects the contact between the user's body and the saw blade, the ignition circuit melts the fusible member 丄 2 2, thereby releasing the claw 'the pawl engages the saw blade' Make the saw blade stop suddenly. It should be able to breathe: by setting the pawl and charging plate on the bracket 2 2 8 attached to the swing arm, when the saw blade is adjusted, the pawl and charging plate Will move with the blade. This eliminates the need to reposition the pawl and / or charging pad each time the blade is moved. Furthermore, the specific embodiment of the safety stop mechanism 30 shown in FIG. 18 is suitable for easy installation or convenient modification of existing table saws without a safety stop mechanism. The only thing to do to modify an existing table saw is: Drill one or more screw holes at the end of the swing arm to accommodate the screw inspection 2 3 Q. The correct positioning of the bracket 2 2 § can be adjusted as needed, for example, to extend downwards for installation inside a special sawing machine housing. Although a special implementation of the safety stop mechanism 30 has been described with a table saw, it will be understood from this description that any of the implementation methods and variations described above can also be applied to a table saw system. In addition, although a special table saw architecture is used to describe the safety stop mechanism 30, it can be understood from this description that the safety stop mechanism can also be used in any embodiment and implementation of the present invention. Method of table saw architecture. 67 This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) rv -------- Order ---------- Line (Please read the precautions on the back before (Fill in this page) 4 5 Β8 Γ 5. Description of the invention (α) For example, 'as shown in Figure 18, the swing arm is designed to pivot around a shaft near the front of the table saw. As a result, when the pawl engages the wrong piece and the angular momentum of the saw blade is transmitted to the swing arm, depending on the weight of the swing arm and the clearance in the worm wheel 24, the swing arm may tend to rise upward. If the swing arm rises upward, the saw blade will also rise, which may increase the injury to the user. This transfer of angular momentum is unlikely to be a problem where the pawl is mounted on the frame of a sawing machine. However, where the pawl is mounted on a swing arm, you may want to set the pivot center of the swing arm behind the table saw. This architecture can be seen in Figure 18 by reversing the direction of rotation of the saw blade and moving the brake onto the swing arm. The front of the saw will be on the left in Figure 18. In this architecture, the angular momentum of the saw blade when it is transmitted to the swing arm by the pawl tends to push the saw blade down, rather than pushing it upward. Alternatively, the worm gear can be held in position by a spring to allow the worm gear to move so that the swing arm can deflect downward when the saw blade is blocked. In addition, when the plastic bushing is placed between the saw blade and the mandrel as described previously, the substantial force generated by the blocking saw blade causes the bushing to deform almost immediately. Generally, when the blade tries to rotate around the pawl, the edge of the blade mounting hole will bite into the bushing. Therefore, if the pawl is mounted on the back of the saw blade (as shown in FIG. 18), then when the pawl engages the saw blade, the blade will tend to move down into the bushing, and Leave the user. Because of this effect, if the pivot pin is moved to the back of the saw as described above, it is often desirable to mount the pawl on the swing arm. 68 (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) Order-; Line _ Printed by Jingbin Ministry of Intellectual Property Staff Consumer Cooperative Co., Ltd. This paper is sized for China National Standards (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) Printed by the Consumer Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs' 45BBB2 A7 ____B7___ V. Description of Invention (lL) / As discussed above, in some implementation methods of the safety stop mechanism 30, the safety stop mechanism 30 is triggered After stopping the cutting tool, it may be necessary to replace part of the safety stop mechanism 30 (for example, the brake pawl 1 40, the fusible member 1 2 2 and so on). Therefore, in another alternative embodiment of the present invention, a part or all of the safety stopper mechanism 30 is provided in a stopper box or stopper module that can be easily replaced. Fig. 19 shows an example of a cassette-type safety stopper using the table saw of Fig. 18 as an example. The trigger box 2 4 6 generally includes a frame or housing 2 4 8 which can be attached to a support surface near the wrong piece 6 4 like a mounting bracket 2 2 8. The detent box 2 4 6 can be secured to the surface of the support by any suitable mechanism, including bolts 2 50. Alternatively or additionally, the trigger box may be architecturally designed to fit in a socket or other suitable container on the mounting bracket. Preferably, the trigger box has an asymmetric shape so that it can only be fixed to the surface of the support in the correct orientation. In the exemplary embodiment of FIG. 19, the mounting bracket includes a shoulder-shaped protrusion 2 5 2 corresponding to a slope 2 in the housing 2 4 8 5 4 so that the snap-in box cannot be loaded unless the bevel is aligned with the shoulder protrusion. It will be understood from this description that there are many other methods within the scope of the invention to ensure that the trigger box is in the correct orientation. The trigger box 2 4 6 also includes an electrical connector 2 5 6 which is architecturally designed to be operable to chew a plug 2 5 8 attached to the cable 2 6 0. This cable includes useful 69 -------- order --------- (read the precautions on the back before filling this page) This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 specifications (210 X 297 mm) Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 458862 A7 ______B7__ V. Description of the invention (//)) For the conductors supplying and transmitting electricity to the electronic device unit, and the cables with shielding function 6 0 and 90 and other input signal lines. The cable can also conduct output signals from the electronics unit, such as a shutdown signal, to stop the motor assembly 1 2. Although the plug 2 58 and the cable 2 60 are shown in the figure as being freely movable, it will be understood from this description that the plug 2 5 8 can be firmly mounted on the surface of the support. Furthermore, the plugs 2 5 8 can be securely placed in a position that will ensure that the snap box is properly aligned and properly oriented when the connector is engaged with the plug. As a further safety measure-this measure will be discussed further below. The electronic device unit can be architecturally designed to provide a start signal to the power source of the saw, thus preventing the saw from being installed incompletely. It is used in the case of moving box. The housing 2 4 8 includes an opening 2 6 2 through which the pawl can protrude to the outside when the pawl is released. Alternatively, the pawl can be made flush with the surface of the housing 2 4 8 before being used. In any case, the pawl is pivotably connected to the housing 2 4 8 by a shoulder bolt 1 4 2 so that once the user's body is in contact with the saw blade, the pawl The pawl moves toward the blade and engages the blade. The shoulder bolts 1 4 2 can be mounted on the housing 2 4 8 or can be mounted on the surface of the support and extend through the openings in the housing and pawl. It is also useful to cover the pawl and the opening with a metal foil 2 2 9 or the like to prevent contamination or accidental protrusion of the pawl. Generally speaking, the actuating box 2 4 6 is structurally designed so that the interval between the pawl and the saw blade can be adjusted according to actual needs. For example, 70 Γ —'-------- Order --------- line -----_ (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) This paper size applies to Chinese national standards (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) 45 BSS2 Printed by the Consumers ’Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs B7 V. Invention Description (U) You can use, for example, pivoting or sliding on one or more mounting bolts. The manner of the detent box is adjusted to adjust the position of the detent box 2 4 6 relative to the saw blade. In this case, if necessary, the interval between the pawl and the saw blade can be determined by taking the interval between the pawl and the actuating box indirectly. Alternatively, the detent box can be fixed 'and the detents can be adjusted inside the detent box. As a further alternative, both the actuating box and the pawl can be designed to be adjustable. Similarly, the position of the mounting bracket relative to the saw blade can also be adjusted. In this exemplary embodiment, the stopper box 2 4 6 contains most of the safety stopper mechanism 30, which includes a stopper, a spring, a fusible member, and a contact post. , Grounding post, and electronic unit. Alternatively, the charging plates 62 and 64 may be housed inside the trigger case. Placing most of the safety stop mechanism 30 inside the stop box allows the manufacturer to develop improved electronic devices and additional functions without major modifications to the machine. Another alternative is that only a part of the safety stop mechanism 30 is placed inside the stopper box, such as a claw, a spring, and a fusible member. One of the advantages of this alternative is that it will reduce the cost of the trigger box. As a further alternative, the safety stop mechanism 30 may include a plurality of stop boxes. For example, 'One trigger box 2 4 6 may include a claw, a spring, a fusible member, and a contact post and a ground post. However,' the other trigger box may include an electronic unit. The trigger box 2 4 6 is optional. The ground adopts different sizes or structures to adapt to different size saw blades. For example, the one shown in Figure 19 is more suitable for the Chinese standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) than the 71-size paper -------------. / λ -------- Order --------- line (please read the notes on the back before filling out this page) Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 4 5 88 6 A7 __________B7_______ 5. Description of the invention (^) The long actuating box can be used for saw blades of different diameters. Furthermore, different trigger boxes can be provided for different purposes and different types of saw blades (for example: plywood saws, side saws, etc.). For example, 'a first trigger box with a first type of claws can be used in the first type of saw blade' However, a second trigger box with a second type of different claws can be used in a second type On different saw blades. Another alternative is that the electronics of one trigger box may be different from the electronics of another trigger box ' so as to be suitable for different uses (for example, cutting plastic instead of wood). In addition, it is also within the scope of the present invention to use a plurality of detent boxes at the same time to ensure that the safety detent mechanism can respond most appropriately to each material. Turning now to Figs. 20 and 21, there is shown an exemplary safety stop mechanism 30 for a miter saw 27 (also known as a chopping saw). It will be understood from this description that the miter saw 2 70 can be any type of miter saw, including a simple miter saw, a compound miter saw, a sliding compound miter saw, and so on. Generally speaking, the miter saw 270 includes a base or a holder 2 72, which is suitable for holding a workpiece to be cut. A swing arm 2 7 4 is pivotably connected to the base 2 7 2 so that the swing arm 2 7 4 can be pivoted downward to the base 2 7 2. Attached to the swing arm 2 7 4 is a housing 2 7 6 which can be adapted to at least partially enclose a circular saw blade 6 4. A motor assembly 12 is connected to the housing 2 7 6, and the motor assembly 12 includes a rotating mandrel 70, on which a saw blade is mounted. The motor assembly 1 2 includes a paper size of 72 which is applicable to the Chinese national standard (CNS > A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) I I I I--Λ ---------I rv. (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) 45ΒΒΒ2 Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs Α7 Β7 V. Description of the invention (" Jg) A handle 2 7 8 with a trigger 2 8 0 makes The saw can be operated freely. The saw blade 64 is rotated downward toward the swing arm 2 7 4. An optional blade guard (not shown) can be extended from the bottom of the case 2 7 6 to cover any part of the blade exposed from the case. Any of the above-mentioned structures and designs of the safety stop mechanism 30 can be used in the miter saw 270. In the exemplary embodiment shown in Figs. 20 and 21, the safety stop mechanism 30 is a cassette system. With the exception of the charging plates 62 and 66, both the brake system 34 and the contact detection system 32 are included in the detent box 24.6. The trigger box 2 4 6 is structurally designed to mount the trigger box 2 4 6 on the front side inner surface of the housing 2 7 6 with one or more bolts 2 50. The housing may include a movable panel or a movable door 2 7 7 to allow personnel to access the actuating box. A brake pawl 14 is mounted inside the striker 'and can be placed in front of the saw blade. The charging plates 6 2 and 6 6 are connected to the inner wall of the housing 2 7 6 by one or more mounts 2 8 2. These mounts 2 8 2 are by any suitable mechanism like screw inspection 2 8 4 and so on are attached to the housing, and are structurally designed to enable the charging plate to be parallel and closely abut the saw blade 64. As shown in FIG. 21, the interval between the charging plate and the saw blade is preferably significantly less than the interval between the charging plate and the case 'so as to reduce any parasitic capacitance between the charging plate and the case To the smallest extent. Alternatively, the housing may be made of an electrically insulating material. Shielded cables 60 and 90 connect these charging pads to 73 + 周 national currency standard (CNS) A4 specification (21〇χ 297 mm 2 -------- order --------- line--r (Please read the precautions on the back before filling in this I) A7 4 5 88 8 2 __B7 V. Description of the invention (q 1) Stop box. Safety stop mechanism 3 The power of 0 is supplied by a cable extending from the motor assembly 12. In addition to engaging the pawl with the saw blade, the electronic unit inside the detent box 2 4 6 is also architecturally designed for use When the contact between the user and the saw blade is detected, the power to the motor assembly 12 can be interrupted. As discussed above with the table saw, a circular saw blade that rotates at a speed of thousands of revolutions per minute has A considerable amount of angular momentum. Therefore, when the pawl engages a circular saw blade as previously described in miter saw 2 70 and stops the blade within milliseconds, the angular momentum must be transmitted Into the brake. Because the swing arm of the miter saw is free to pivot in the direction of the blade rotation, when the blade is suddenly When staying, the angular momentum of the saw blade can be transmitted to the swing arm, causing the swing arm to swing downward. This sudden and powerful downward movement of the swing arm if the user's body is partly sawing When it is under the blade, it may cause injury to the user. Therefore, an alternative embodiment of the safety stop mechanism 30 of the miter saw also includes a mechanism for preventing the swing arm from moving toward the direction when the blade is stopped. In addition, the pawl is generally installed in front of the miter saw, so that when the saw blade is engaged with the pawl, the saw blade is driven to climb up and away from the user (that is, the plastic bush is deformed) ). It will be understood from this description that there are many suitable mechanisms that can be used to prevent a sudden downward movement of the swing arm. For example, the pivotal connection between the swing arm and the base of the miter saw can be buckled by an electrical mechanism For example, use a leaf spring of an electromagnet to prevent the swing arm from pivoting. The signal used to lock the joint can be provided by the detection system. Another 74 books The paper size is in accordance with the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 Gongchu). ί {Please read the notes on the back before filling out this page) Printed by the Consumer Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs, printed A7 A7 Printed by the Consumer Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs, printed by the Consumer Cooperative _____B7__ V. Description of Invention (ji) The alternative is A damper may be connected between the swing arm and the base to limit the time when the blade is detected to be in contact with the user and the time when the blade is stopped by the claws. How far the film can move. Although there are many other ways to connect the swing arm to the base to prevent sudden movement of the swing arm in the direction of the base, most of these designs transfer angular momentum to the swing arm / base assembly. Depending on the weight and balance of the saw, this angular momentum may be sufficient to cause the entire saw to tip over. Therefore, it is necessary to fix the base to a stable surface with fixing clips, bolts, and the like. Another alternative: the miter saw is architecturally designed to absorb any angular momentum without allowing the swing arm to move downward. For example, the exemplary embodiment shown in FIGS. 20 and 21 has a pivoting motor assembly in architecture to allow the saw blade to move upward into the housing once it engages with the pawl. The motor assembly 12 is connected to the housing 2 7 6 via a pivot bolt 2 8 6, which allows the motor assembly 12 to pivot about the bolt 2 8 6 in the direction of the saw blade rotation. A spring 2 9 2 is compressed between the housing and the holder 2 9 4 so as to apply a biasing force to the motor assembly in the direction opposite to the direction of rotation of the saw blade. The motor assembly 12 also includes a projection 2 9 6 which slides against a flange 2 9 8 on the housing to hold the end of the motor assembly 12 against The position of the pivot bolt on the housing. When the sawing machine is in use, the spring 2 9 2 keeps the motor assembly in a normal position completely opposite the direction of rotation of the saw blade. However, once the pawl is released to engage the saw blade, the motor assembly and 75 paper sizes apply the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) \ J. . -------------. k -------- Order --------- (Please read the notes on the back before filling out this page) Printed by the Consumers ’Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs A7 r — _ B7 V. Invention Explanation n) The saw blade is pivoted upward against the biasing direction of the spring. In this embodiment, the pawl is placed in front of the saw blade so that the pivot bolt 2 8 6 is between the pawl and the spindle. This arrangement encourages the saw blade to move up into the housing when blocked. The spring is selected to have sufficient strength to keep the motor assembly 12 in a lower position when cutting through a workpiece, but it is also sufficiently compressible to allow the blade and the blade to be blocked when the blade is blocked. The motor assembly can be moved upwards. Although an exemplary implementation method of a safety stop mechanism 30 has been described above by using a miter saw as an example, the present invention should not be considered to be limited to any one specific implementation method, because the safety stop mechanism 3 The architecture and design of 0 can obviously vary according to the type and use of the sawing machine. For example, the pivot motor assembly architecture can also be incorporated into one or more of the other systems described above that prevent the swing arm from pivoting suddenly toward the base. It will be further understood from this description that the saw blade and motor assembly can be architecturally designed in various ways to at least partially absorb the angular momentum of the saw blade. Figure 22 shows an alternative architecture of the miter saw 270, which is designed to absorb the angular momentum of the saw blade. In this embodiment, the beveled data 2 70 includes two swing arms 2 7 5 and 2 7 4. One end 30 of each of the swing arms 2 7 5 and 2 7 4 is connected to the base 2 7 2, and the other opposite end 3 2 of the swing arm is connected to the housing 2 7 6, the saw blade 6 4, and / Or motor assembly (not shown). The positions of the swing arms relative to each other can be changed according to the desired swing arm movement. In Figure 22, the swing arm 2 7 5 is connected to the base 2 7 76 using the national standard (CNS) A4 specification (21〇χ 297 mm) \ J ·. ---- ^ -------- Order --------- line (please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) Duty Printing of Employees' Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 4b 8b 6 2 A7 __B7 ___ ^ 5. Description of the invention 2 is slightly lower than the swing arm 2 7 4. Generally the 'motor assembly is firmly attached to the end 3 0 2 of the swing arm 2 7 5, whereas the' housing 2 7 Θ is connected to be rotatable around the end 3 2 of the swing arm 2 7 5 . The end 3 2 of the swing arm 2 7 4 is only connected to the housing. This arrangement makes the motor assembly and trigger act the same as in many traditional miter saws. Another alternative is' the motor assembly may be connected to rotate the housing around the end 3 2 of the swing arm 2 7 5. The architecture shown in Figure 2 causes the housing and / or motor assembly to rotate together as the swing arm pivots. Obviously 'when the swing arm moves upward, the housing and / or motor assembly rotates in the same direction as the direction of rotation of the saw blade when cutting. Result' When the pawl engages the saw blade and transmits the saw blade When angular momentum arrives at the housing and / or motor assembly, the housing and / or motor assembly tends to rotate in the same direction as the saw blade. This causes these swing arms to pivot upwards, dragging the saw blade away from the workpiece and the user's body. Therefore, as described above, the miter saw frame in FIG. 22 is adapted to absorb the angular momentum of the saw blade and convert the angular momentum into an upward force acting on the swing arm. The structure of FIG. 22 described above illustrates a further alternative embodiment of the safety stop mechanism 30. Specifically, the safety stop mechanism 30 can be architecturally designed so that when the saw blade of the cutting tool touches the user's body, the safety stop mechanism can also stop the saw blade. Move the saw blade of the cutting tool quickly away from the user, or do not stop the saw blade but quickly move the saw blade away from the user's body. This alternative embodiment can use any cutting tool described here -V -------- Order --------- Thread ---- (Please read the Note: Please fill in this page again) This paper size is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) A7 458862 B7___ 5. Description of the invention Γ). For example, the swing arm 2 2 0 of the table saw in FIG. 18 can be designed to be able to disengage the worm wheel 2 2 4 when a contact is detected, and pivot downward to pull the saw blade to the sawing machine. Top surface. A spring (not shown) can be incorporated into the swing arm to increase its speed of falling downwards. It will be understood from this description that similar embodiments can be used in all the copper described here. In the case of a miter saw, the electromagnetic disc brakes previously discussed can be used to prevent the swing arm from moving when it touches the user. Additionally, the release system can be used to When a person makes contact, release the spring to push the swing arm upward. With such a system, there is no need to stop the saw suddenly to avoid injury. Fig. 23 illustrates an exemplary implementation method of the safety stop mechanism 30 by means of the rotary arm saw 3 1 0. Generally speaking, 1 rotary arm saw 3 1 0 includes a horizontal base 3 1 2, a vertical post 3 1 2 extending upward from the horizontal base 3 1 2 and a vertical post 3 1 4 extending from the horizontal post 3 1 4 1 2 Vertically spaced guide arms 3 1 6. A slider 3 1 8 is slidably connected to the bottom surface of the guide arm 3 1 6. The bottom end of the slider 3 1 8 is connected to the saw housing 3 2 0 and the motor assembly 3 2 2, which can cause the saw blade 6 4 to be pulled over the base to cut off the workpiece supported on the base (not shown in the figure). show). Any of the above-mentioned structures and arrangements of the safety stop mechanism 30 can be used in the rotary arm saw 3 1 0. For example, the safety stop mechanism 30 can be placed in a stopper box 2 4 6 which can be mounted on the saw housing 3 2 0 adjacent to the saw blade. Charging pads 6 2 and 6 6 (not shown in the figure) 78 k -------- order --------- line < Please read the notes on the back before filling out this page) Printed by the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs, Employee Consumer Cooperatives This paper is printed in accordance with Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) A7 458862 ___B7______ 5. Description of the invention (7 厶) It can also be installed inside the casing or other appropriate positions as described above. The brake pawl 1 40 is architecturally designed to engage the blade 64 and stop it when the blade comes into contact with the user's body. Although the claw is shown mounted near the rear side of the saw blade, the claw may be installed in front of the saw blade or any other desired position. It should be noted that, as previously explained, if the blade is separated from the mandrel by a deformable bushing, the blade will be easily upward if the pawl engages the front end of the blade Move into the case. The slider 3 1 8 is generally mounted on the guide arm 3 1 6 to prevent the bracket from pivoting relative to the guide arm 3 1 6. Therefore, the transfer of the angular momentum of the saw blade into the housing and the guide arm usually does not cause the guide arm to move toward the user's body when braking. However, when a contact is detected, because the user may be pulling the saw in their own direction, the saw may continue to face the user even after the safety stop mechanism 30 has stopped the saw blade mobile. This continued movement may cause the stopped saw blade to be dragged across the user's body (for example, the user's hand), resulting in further injury. Therefore, it is hoped that an additional braking system can be obtained so as to stop the movement of the carriage and the saw along the arm of the guide bow once the saw blade comes into contact with the user's body. This brake system can also be used as an alternative to stopping the saw blade, especially when the brake system is designed to be pulled to pull the carriage backward to leave the user > This design can be used To replace the original braking system. It will be understood from this description: there are many different ways to stop the 79 — " -'-------- Order --------- line (please read the notes on the back before filling (This page) Printed by the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 'Consumer Cooperatives This paper is printed in accordance with the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 x 297 mm) 45 8 Printed by the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs' Consumer Cooperatives A87 87 V. Invention Description The slider 3 1 8 slides along the guide arm 3 1 6. Figure 23 illustrates only two examples of many suitable slide brake architectures within the scope of the present invention. One of the illustrated slide brake architectures includes a pivot pawl assembly 3 2 4. The pivoting pawl assembly 3 2 4 is provided with a pawl 3 2 8 which is pivotably connected to the guide carriage 3 1 8. An actuator 3 3 0 mounted on the slider 3 1 8 is operatively matched with the safety stop mechanism 3 0, and is structurally designed to engage the pawl 3 2 8. Under normal operating conditions, the actuator 3 30 keeps the pawl spaced from the guide arm 3 16 minutes. However, when contact between the saw blade and the user's body is found, the safety stop mechanism 30 sends an actuation signal to the actuator 3 3 0. The actuation signal sent to the actuator may be the same signal as the signal for starting the ignition system 115, or it may be a different signal. In any case, upon receiving the actuation signal, the actuator drives the pawl 3 2 8 to pivot it into the guide arm, preventing the guide carriage from moving further along the The guide arm moves forward. The pawl can be made of a material with high friction such as rubber, etc., or its surface can be covered with such a material, and / or the structure of the shape can be increased by the use of gear teeth and other structures . Another exemplary brake architecture shown in Figure 23 includes a lockable drum assembly 3 3 2. The lockable roll assembly 3 3 2 can be used in place of the wedge mechanism assembly 3 2 4 or in addition to the wedge mechanism assembly 3 2 4. In any case, the lockable roll assembly 3 3 2 includes a spring-operated roll 3 3 4 mounted on a vertical support 3 1 4. One tether or cable 3 3 80 This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 x 297 mm) ^ -------- Order --------- line (please first Read the notes on the back and fill in this page again) A7 458862 —____ B7__ 5. Description of the invention 〇 彳) One end of 6 is connected to the slider 3 1 8; however, the other end is wound around the spring-operated reel 3 3 4 All around. When the user pulls the hall across the base, the reel unfolds' and the tether 3 3 6 is extended. The loading force exerted by the spring of the reel ensures that the reel can hold the tether 3 3 6-a slight tension 'and when the user pulls the saw back towards the vertical post' the tether 3 3 6 Take it up on the roll. The lockable reel assembly 3 3 2 also includes a reel brake such as a pawl 3 3 8 'which is operatively linked to a safety stop mechanism 30. Therefore, when the contact between the saw blade and the user's body is detected, the safety stop mechanism 30 sends an actuation signal to the reel brake, so that the reel is locked and fixed. Once the reel is secured, the tether 3 3 6 prevents the restaurant from advancing further—moving away from the vertical pillar 3 1 4. In an alternative implementation of the lockable reel assembly 3 3 2 which is not shown in the figure, 'the lockable reel assembly may be housed in the lock box 2 4 6 or disposed adjacent to the lock The place of the moving box 2 4 6 'In this case, the tether 3 3 6 will be pulled backward from the roll to the vertical post 3 1 4. It will be understood from this technical description that there are many different alternative methods, devices and architectures that can be used to stop the movement of the guide carriage and saw along the guide arm. Any one or more of these alternatives can be used in place of or in addition to the brake architecture described above and shown in Figure 23. Fig. 24 illustrates a safety stop mechanism 30 implemented in a hand-held circular saw 340. Generally speaking, the hand-held circular saw 3 4 0 includes a housing 3 4 2 which includes a motor assembly (not shown in the picture. This paper size is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 specifications). (210 X 297 mm) V? ».. '. 4 -------- Order --------- Line (Please read the notes on the back before filling this page) Wisdom of the Ministry of Economy Printed by the Consumer Cooperative of the Property Bureau ^^ 8862 Printed by the Consumer Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs A7 __B7_________ 5. Description of the invention (1) shown), a guide plate 3 4 4, and a telescopic blade protection device 3 4 6. The saw blade 64 is connected to the motor assembly via a mandrel 70. The safety stop mechanism 30 can be applied to the saw 3 4 0 ° according to any of the various embodiments and architectures described previously. In the exemplary implementation method shown in Figure 2 4., the safety stop mechanism is Shown as a box-type system. The detent box 2 4 6 includes a detent pawl 1 40, and the detent box 2 4 6 is connected to the housing 3 4 2 so that the detent can engage the saw blade. The charging plate (not shown in the figure) can be mounted on the inside of a housing adjacent to the blade or any other location suitable for capacitively coupling the input signal across the blade. The illustrated trigger box 2 4 6 and the claw are installed adjacent to the front side of the blade to avoid interference with the retractable blade guard 3 4 6. Alternatively, the pawl and the trigger box 2 4 6 can be mounted anywhere near the saw blade. Although the safety stop mechanism 30 has been described above by using table saws, miter saws, rotary arm saws, and circular saws as examples, it can be understood from this technical description that similar implementation methods of the safety stop mechanism 30 will also Suitable for practically any type of machine that uses rotating saw blades with cutting saw teeth on the periphery. As another example of the multiple functions and multiple architectures applicable to the present invention, FIG. 25 illustrates a specific embodiment of another safety stop mechanism 30 by a band saw 3 50. Generally speaking, the band saw 3 5 〇 includes a main casing 3 5 2, which is provided with a pair of vertically separated runners 3 5 4 ° and the periphery of each ~ 3 4 wheels is covered with or Covered with a layer of high friction resistance material, such as rubber. A relatively thin but continuous ring-shaped piece 64 tightly surrounds the two wheels. The work piece is oriented toward the 82-point scale, which is applicable to Zhongguan Jiaxian) --- {Please read the precautions on the back of tf before filling out this page) ij · line. Printed by the Ministry of Economic Affairs, Intellectual Property Bureau, Employee Consumption Cooperative 4 D 6 2 A7 _ B7 V. Description of the invention (press) The direction of the saw blade 6 4 is cut through the cutting area 3 5 5 between the two wheels 3 5 4. An upper saw guide assembly 3 5 6 and a lower saw guide assembly 3 5 8 hold the rotating saw blade in a stable path in the cutting area 3 5 5. The work is placed on a table 360 facing the saw blade through the cutting area, which forms the bottom of the cutting area. The blade should form an electrical insulation between the main housing, which is often grounded. Therefore, the slat guide assemblies 3 5 6 and 3 5 8-these sliver guide assemblies can include ball bearing guides and friction pads-are structurally a saw blade and the main housing Make electrical isolation between them. In addition, the high-friction coating on the runner 3 5 4 electrically isolates the saw blade from the runner 3 5 4. Alternatively, these runners may be made of a non-conductive material. Charging pads 62 and 66 can be arranged in many different ways, depending on their use and space constraints on the main housing. Two possible arrangements are illustrated in Figure 25. In this first mode, the charging plates 6 2 and 6 6 are arranged next to the saw blade straddling one of the two wheels 3 5 4. The charging plate can be made arc-shaped to match the periphery of the runner, and a fixed size interval is maintained between the two charging plates and the saw blade. This arrangement has the advantage that it is easy to maintain a fixed saw blade-to-charging plate spacing because the saw blade is maintained in a path that is fixed to the periphery of the runner. The charging board may be connected to the main case 'via a non-conductive mounting table to maintain electrical insulation from the case. Among the many possible arrangements of the charging board, another way includes a charging board mounting base 3 6 2 'The charging board mounting base 3 6 2 is structurally 83. " -------- Order- ------- Line (Please read the precautions on the back before filling in this page) The paper size applies the national standard (CNS) A4 (21〇χ 297 mm) A7 B7 4-5 88 6 2 5. Description of the invention (p |) extends along a saw blade running between two runners 3 5 4. As can be seen particularly from the detailed view of FIG. 26, the charging plate mounting base includes charging plates 62 and 66. In the illustrated embodiment, the charging board mounting base has a substantially C-shaped cross-section, and its size can be fitted to the side edge and the rear edge of the saw blade (that is, the side edge of the side without the wrong teeth) ). The charging plate mounting seat is mounted on the main casing 3 5 2 and is elastically pushed laterally by, for example, one or more springs 3 6 4 toward the moving saw blade. Because the blade 64 may tend to deflect or shift slightly on its path, the spring 3 6 4 ensures that the charging plate mount can move with the blade. The charging plate mounting base 3 6 2 is generally made of durable and non-conductive materials such as ceramics' plastics. Charging pads 6 2 and 6 6 are provided on or inside the charging pad mounting base 3 6 2. Although the charging plates shown in the figure are provided on the opposite side of the saw blade 64, these charging plates may be replaced and arranged on the same side of the saw blade. This self-aligning structure of the charging plate mount can ensure that the gap between the saw blade and the charging plate is substantially fixed despite the saw blade moving. The safety stop mechanism 30 may include a brake system 34 having one or more pawls (not shown), which pawls are designed on the frame bottle to detect the saw blade and the user's body When contact between them occurs, the pawl can engage the blade and stop the blade. These pawls can be arranged to engage the teeth of the saw blade or the sides of the saw blade as described previously. Due to the high frictional force and the high tension of the saw blade being press-fitted onto the wheel, it may be necessary to stop the blade while stopping one or both of the two wheels. Therefore, the alternative method is that these 84 paper sizes are applicable to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (21 × X 297 mm) · ', ------ · W -------- Order- -------- Line (锖 Read the notes on the back before filling in this page > Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs A7 4 b 88 6 2 __B7__ V. Description of the invention ((5 ^) The pawl can be designed to engage one or both of the runners 3 5 4. However, since the band saw runners 3 5 4 generally have a relatively high mass, the angular momentum of the rotating runners may be Quite large, a large force is required in order to be able to actually stop the saw blade and the runner at the same time. Therefore, a further alternative embodiment of the brake system 34 is shown in Figs. As explained below, the alternative brake system 3 4 is architecturally designed to cut the blade 6 4 when it detects that contact between the blade and the user's body is detected. By cutting the blade The saw blade is released around the tension press on the runner 3 5 4 so that the saw blade can be stopped without stopping As can be seen more clearly in the detailed view of Fig. 27, the alternative braking system 34 includes an explosive cable or bolt cutting device 3 6 6 which is an explosive cable cutting device. 3 6 6 can be placed adjacent to the saw blade 6 4 to cut it off when a start signal is received. Appropriate cable cutting devices 3 6 6 are available from a variety of suppliers, these suppliers Including Cartr idge Actuated Devices, Inc. of Fairfield, New Jersey. The size and structure of the cable cutting device 3 6 6 can depend on the size and width of the saw blade 6 4, the material of the saw blade, and the speed of the saw blade. Change. In general, the cable cutting device 3 6 6 will be placed close to the lower surface of the work table 3 60 to prevent the saw blade from continuing to move downward after being cut. A similar to the previously described The electronic device unit 2 4 2 is operatively coupled to the cable cutting device 3 6 6 so as to transmit an activation 85 once the electronic device unit detects contact between the user's body and the saw blade ^ ----- --- Order --------- Line --- (Please read first Please fill in this page again for details.) The printed paper size for employees' cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs applies to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 x 297 mm) A7 45 88 6 2 ____ ^ -— V. Explanation of the invention (">) A signal is sent to the device 3 6 6. Then, the cable cutting device 3 6 6 cuts the saw blade almost instantaneously, thereby 'releasing the tensioning press fitting of the saw blade around the runner 3 5 4 . Once cut, even if the runner 3 5 4 continues to rotate, however, the saw blade substantially stops moving. As previously stated, the 'safety stop mechanism 3 0 can be selectively architecturally designed to turn off the motor connected to the band saw 3 5 0 while cutting off the saw blade. In addition, one or more pawls (not shown) can be architecturally designed such that when the cable cutting device 3 6 6 cuts the saw blade, the pawls will engage the saw blade and stop its Move to ensure that the saw blade does not continue to move after being cut ° Except for cutting machines with blades with favorable teeth, 'many of Pu'er's machines, such as seam planers, planers, etc.' are generally used The upper part is a cylindrical blade, and one or more narrow blades are provided on the blade. These blades are installed on the outer surface of the blade. In operation, the cutter head rotates around its central axis of the cylinder. When the workpiece passes laterally through the cutter head, the blade creates a wide cut on the abutting surface of the workpiece. As with other cutting machines mentioned above, machines with cylindrical blades may cause serious injuries if the blades in operation come into contact with the user's body. Therefore, Fig. 28 illustrates a specific embodiment of an exemplary safety stop mechanism 30 used in a seam planer 500 to prevent serious injury to a user. For the sake of clarity, many components of this safety stop mechanism 30 are not shown in ® 28 because they are similar to the safety stop mechanisms used in other cutting devices described previously. . The joint planer 5 0 0 includes a 7351 5 0 2 which is generally in the shape of a stigma. The cutter head 5 2 2 is mounted on a mandrel 5 0 4 'and 86. The paper size applies to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 size (210 X 297 mm) νκ -------- Order --------- line ί ^ (Please read the notes on the back before filling this page) Member of the Intellectual Property Bureau, Ministry of Economic AffairsΗ Printed by the Consumer Cooperative A7 45 8862 ____BL______ 5. Description of the invention (ff) Rotate on the mandrel. Mandrel—It is usually installed in one or more bearing assemblies (not shown in the figure) and is rotatably driven by a motor assembly (not shown in the figure). The motor assembly is directly Is coupled to the mandrel, or is coupled to the mandrel by a belt and pulley system. The cutter head is installed in a main frame assembly 506, and extends upward in the space between the feeding table 508 and the discharge lift 5 10. A workpiece is cut by sliding the workpiece along the feed table 5 + 08 through the cutter head and into the discharge table 5 10. In general, the vertical position of the feeding table 508 and the discharging table 510 can be independently adjusted to control the depth of the cut into the workpiece. The blade is often made of a metal material such as steel and generally includes three blades 5 1 2 which are mounted on the surface of the blade and extend beyond the surface of the blade. It will be understood from this technical description: These cutting machines can use more or fewer blades, and the use of the safety stop mechanism 30 of the present invention is not limited to the number of blades on the blade head 502. One or more bushes 514 made of a non-conductive material are placed between the cutter head and the mandrel so as to isolate the cutter head and blades from the frame 506. The charging plates 62 and 66 can be placed adjacent to the cutter head to connect the signals generated by the first electrical system 38 that crosses the cutter head. In Figure 2-8, these charging plates (shown by dashed lines in the figure) are mounted near a flat end of the blade. Another alternative is that the mandrel can be isolated from the frame, and the charging plates can be placed around the mandrel, as previously described in conjunction with Figure 5. Due to the relatively few blades, the paper size between the user's body and the blade is ~ 87th. This paper size applies to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 297 mm)-clothing --- (Please read the note on the back first Please fill in this page again) Order--· Line 丨 Γ Printed by the Employees 'Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs Printed by the Employees' Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 45 88 6 2 A7 B7 One of the leaves is on the surface of the blade itself. However, these blades and blade heads are electrically connected together1 so any contact with the user's body can be detected whether or not the blades occur. Once the contact is detected, the braking system is activated in order to quickly stop the rotation of the cutter head 502. The braking system may include a pivoting pawl that can pivot and engage one of the blades in the manner described above. The pawl is structurally made to have the same width as the cylinder of the cutter head so as to engage the entire length of the blade ', not just a smaller part of the blade. Generally, the blade will not stop the rotation of the blade before the blade has hit the blade, because the surface of the blade is relatively slippery. The pawl can be shaped to extend into the groove on the blade with the blade in order to ensure that the pawl can engage the blade itself in addition to the blade. In addition to the pivoting pawl system just described, FIG. 28 shows another pawl structure that can replace the pawl previously described. The structure includes a flat plate 5 2 0 supported on a slider 5 2 2. The slider 5 2 2 is arranged below the discharge table 5 1 0. When the plate 5 2 0 slides into contact with the blade 5 ◦ 2, the plate 5 2 0 engages the next blade passing through and stops the rotation of the blade. The plate 5 2 0 can be made of any suitable material capable of stopping the cutter head. These materials include: metal, plastic, etc. The plate 5 2 0 can be slid against the cutter head by a bow light spring 1 3 0 held by a fusible member 1 2 2. The fusible member 1 2 2 is surrounded by a pair of contact posts 5 2 4 connected to an ignition system (not shown), so that when a contact with the user's body is detected 88 6 paper size Applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) -------------, .- 4 — (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) 线. 线45BS ^ A7 B7 Printed by the Consumer Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs. 5. Description of the Invention (ft), the fusible member 1 2 2 is melted, and the spring 1 30 is released. It should be noted that the spring 130 is released through a duplex mechanism to allow a higher strength spring without increasing the size of the fusible member 12 2. Although the plate 5 2 0 in the illustration is provided on the upper rear side of the cutter head, instead of this arrangement, the plate can also be placed at any position adjacent to the cutter head under the feeding table and the discharging table. For example, the plate can be placed under the feeding table as shown by the dotted line in the figure. It is also possible to use a plurality of flat plates and set them at various positions such as the front side and the back side of the blade. For a normal blade with three blades and rotating at about 5000 revolutions per minute, the blade will rotate in about 12 milliseconds to complete a stack. There will be approximately 4 milliseconds between the contact and the contact of the next blade. Therefore, the cutter head should preferably stop completely in less than 8 milliseconds from the beginning of physical contact with the user, and more preferably stop in less than 4 milliseconds. In the former case, no more than 2 blades will contact the user's body, but in the latter case, no more than 1 blade will contact the user. However, longer stopping times are acceptable. It will be understood from this technical description: To achieve the best performance of the safety stop mechanism 30, the position of the pawl around the cutter head can be adjusted according to the time between contact detection and the engagement of the pawl to ensure The pawl engages the cutter head some time before passing through the blade, rather than engaging the pawl with the cutter head after passing through a blade. Otherwise, the blade will continue to rotate until the next blade hits the pawl. Another alternative is that the cutter head can be made structurally along the length direction of the cutter head. 89 paper sizes adopt the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) ^ ---- ---- Order --------- line-.J (Please read the notes on the back before filling out this page) 4 5 88 ^ 2 Printed by the Intellectual Property Bureau Employee Consumer Cooperative of the Ministry of Economic Affairs Α7 Β7 V. DESCRIPTION OF THE INVENTION (d) One or more grooves are provided, as indicated by the dashed line at the position 5 2 9 in the figure. These grooves are designed to receive the pawl. Then 'if the pawl engages the blade just as it passes through a blade,' the blade will only be stopped until the next groove passes, rather than waiting until the next blade passes live. In addition to the brake system with the pawl as its main structure, FIG. 28 also illustrates another alternative system whose structure is to cover the blades to prevent them from causing harm to the user. Specifically, the alternative brake system includes a substantially flexible sheet-like material 5 30, such as plastic, rubber, metal foil, and the like. The flexible sheet material 5 3 0 includes a hook 5 3 2 which is designed to be adapted to engage any blade 5 1 2. When the hook 5 3 2 is pushed against the cutter head 5 0 2, the next passing blade captures the hook 5 3 2, so that the flexible sheet-like material 5 3 0 is wound around the cutter head when it rotates. Around the cutter head. Thus, the blade is covered with a sheet-like material 530, which protects the user from serious injury. Mounting the hook 5 3 2 on the front section of a flat plate 5 2 0 or other actuator assembly allows the holder $ 3 2 to come into contact with the cutter head. Generally, the outer surface of the suffix 5 3 2 is round or has an inclined surface to prevent the user from being injured when the hook 5 3 2 is pulled around the cutter head. The material 5 3 0 can be stored on a roll 'or can be hung freely under the satiety 5 3 2 until it is wound around the cutter head. Compared with f, η] * ^^ The sheet-like material 5 3 0 has a sufficient length 'so as to completely cover all the blades. Another alternative is that the sheet-like material 5 3〇 on the hook 90 ------ '4 -------- order --------- line -.- (Please read first Note on the back, please fill in this page again) This paper size is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs ^ 45 88 6 > A7 ______B7 _ V. Description of the invention (g ") The opposite end of the sub 5 3 2 can be fastened securely, so as to stop the cutter head before completing a full turn. Additionally, or alternatively, the seam planer motor assembly may be turned off to stop the rotation of the cutter head. A similar system can be implemented on a circular saw blade to cover sharp teeth. Similar to seam planers, planers also use cylindrical heads with one or more cutter blades on the surface. Generally speaking, the cutter head is mounted above a bed with one or more feed rollers, and a work piece passes under the cutter head along these rollers. It will be understood from this technical description that the safety stop mechanism 30 can be designed as a stop mechanism similar to that described above with a joint planer for use with a planer. Therefore, the implementation method of the safety stop mechanism 30 used in the planer will not be explained individually. In addition, it will also be understood that the safety stop mechanism 30 can be similarly designed to be used with other machines using a rotary cutter head, such as: forming machines, notching machines, etc. Although the safety stop mechanism 30 has been designed in the previous explanation to be used to detect the contact between the blade and the user's body, it can be understood from this technical description that the safety stop mechanism 30 can also Additionally or alternatively designed to be architecturally capable of detecting other dangerous situations. For example, the safety stop mechanism 30 can be architecturally designed to detect potential jumps by monitoring the speed or deflection of the blade. If 'Detection detects that there is a sharp drop in blade speed (with power still present) or a significant deflection on the blade, the braking system will be triggered to stop the blade or blade D The leaf speed can be measured by any suitable device, such as turning 91 \ 1 / · — — — — ^ ------ II · 111 [11-- (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page ) This paper size applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210x 297 mm) as b S 2 A7 —--B7____ 5. Description of the invention (J) Speedometer and so on. The deflection of the saw blade can also be detected by using a micro switch or a similar method provided on the side of the saw blade. The invention can also be used to monitor other dangerous situations. Surely, the safety stopper mechanism 30 is a safety stopper mechanism 30 which can be actuated in any of a variety of situations. It should be noted that the detection and braking system of the present invention and its components are separately useful. For example, the brake system of the present invention can be used in conjunction with a glove-based contact system in a meat peeler as described in the background of the invention, or any other suitable contact detection system. Similarly, many different braking systems can be used in conjunction with the contact detection system of the present invention. Still further, the fusible member and the ignition system can be used in any system requiring a member of a quick release biasing mechanism. \ 3 / ^ K .------- Order --------- line (Please read the precautions on the back before filling in this page) 92 copies of paper printed by the Employees' Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs Standards are applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (21〇χ 297 mm)